JC、L4、LK、MAIN、QA、writer
3,127
个编辑
(→Sarvābhāvād abhāvasya sadbhāvān nābhilāpyataḥ | abhilāpaprayogāc ca dharmasaṃjñā caturvidhā ||13||) |
|||
(未显示同一用户的29个中间版本) | |||
第8行: | 第8行: | ||
==1、parama== | ==1、parama== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
parama | parama | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | 〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | [形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | ||
第48行: | 第53行: | ||
==2、anugrah== | ==2、anugrah== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
anu-grah 二级词汇 | anu-grah 二级词汇 | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 rjes su bzung ba, phan 'dogs shing | 〈藏〉 rjes su bzung ba, phan 'dogs shing | ||
【词根来源】 | 【词根来源】 | ||
√grah | √grah | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[动9P] anugṛhṇāti ❶利益,饶益,施恩。❷ 摄受,保护,支持。〔古〕受,摄受,利益,爲益,饶益,摄益,護。 | [动9P] anugṛhṇāti ❶利益,饶益,施恩。❷ 摄受,保护,支持。〔古〕受,摄受,利益,爲益,饶益,摄益,護。 | ||
[使]anugrāhayati 使作利益。 | [使]anugrāhayati 使作利益。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
anu-√grah, to follow in taking or plundering MBh. iv, 996, to support ; to uphold ; to receive, welcome ; to treat with kindness, favour, oblige ; to foster. ► p. 32a | anu-√grah, to follow in taking or plundering MBh. iv, 996, to support ; to uphold ; to receive, welcome ; to treat with kindness, favour, oblige ; to foster. ► p. 32a | ||
==3、jñeya== | ==3、jñeya== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
jñeya | jñeya | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 shes bya,shes par bya ba | 〈藏〉 shes bya,shes par bya ba | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[必分] 应该知道的,被认知的,认知对象。〔古〕 所知,所智,當知,境,境界,所知境,所知境界。 | [必分] 应该知道的,被认知的,认知对象。〔古〕 所知,所智,當知,境,境界,所知境,所知境界。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
jñeya, mfn. to be known (e.g. jñeyo mahârṇavo'tra, it should be known that there is here a great sea VarBṛS. xiv, 19; kathaṃ na jñeyam asmābhir nivartitum, how should we not know how to leave off Bhag. i, 39) Mn. Yājñ. R. &c. ; to be learnt or understood or ascertained or investigated or perceived or inquired about ŚvetUp. i, 12 MBh. iii, 2737 Nal. &c. ► p. 426c | jñeya, mfn. to be known (e.g. jñeyo mahârṇavo'tra, it should be known that there is here a great sea VarBṛS. xiv, 19; kathaṃ na jñeyam asmābhir nivartitum, how should we not know how to leave off Bhag. i, 39) Mn. Yājñ. R. &c. ; to be learnt or understood or ascertained or investigated or perceived or inquired about ŚvetUp. i, 12 MBh. iii, 2737 Nal. &c. ► p. 426c | ||
==4、śārīra== | ==4、śārīra== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
śārīra | śārīra | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 身体的。 | [形] 身体的。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
śārīrá, mf(ī)n. (fr. śarīra) bodily, corporeal, relating or belonging to or being in or produced from or connected with the body (with daṇḍa m. corporal punishment) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; made of bone Suśr. ; ► p. 1066b | śārīrá, mf(ī)n. (fr. śarīra) bodily, corporeal, relating or belonging to or being in or produced from or connected with the body (with daṇḍa m. corporal punishment) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; made of bone Suśr. ; ► p. 1066b | ||
śārīrá, n. bodily constitution MBh. VarBṛS. ; (in med.) the science of the body and its parts, anatomy Suśr. Car. ; the feces, excrement Mn. xi, 202 ; the embodied soul or spirit W. ; = vṛṣa (?) L. ► p. 1066b | śārīrá, n. bodily constitution MBh. VarBṛS. ; (in med.) the science of the body and its parts, anatomy Suśr. Car. ; the feces, excrement Mn. xi, 202 ; the embodied soul or spirit W. ; = vṛṣa (?) L. ► p. 1066b | ||
第86行: | 第119行: | ||
==5、saparigraha== | ==5、saparigraha== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
saparigraha | saparigraha | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 yongs su 'dzin pa dang bcas pa | 〈藏〉 yongs su 'dzin pa dang bcas pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
〔古〕所有。 | 〔古〕所有。 | ||
==6、prāpta== | ==6、prāpta== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
prāpta | prāpta | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
〈藏〉 thob pa,rnyed pa [过分] 获得,到达。〔古〕 得,获得,已得,至得,所得,逮得,證得,所證,至,成就,具足。 | 〈藏〉 thob pa,rnyed pa [过分] 获得,到达。〔古〕 得,获得,已得,至得,所得,逮得,證得,所證,至,成就,具足。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
prâpta, mfn. attained to, reached, arrived at, met with, found, incurred, got, acquired, gained Mn. MBh. &c. ; one who has attained to or reached &c. (acc. or comp.) AV. &c. &c. ; come to (acc.), arrived, present (prâpteṣu kāleṣu, at certain periods) Mn. MBh. &c. ; accomplished, complete, mature, full-grown (see a-pr°) ; (in med.) indicated, serving the purpose Suśr. ; (in gram.) obtained or following from a rule, valid (iti prâpte, “while this follows from a preceding rule”) Pāṇ. 1-1, 34 Sch. &c. ; fixed, placed L. ; proper, right L. ; ► p. 707c | prâpta, mfn. attained to, reached, arrived at, met with, found, incurred, got, acquired, gained Mn. MBh. &c. ; one who has attained to or reached &c. (acc. or comp.) AV. &c. &c. ; come to (acc.), arrived, present (prâpteṣu kāleṣu, at certain periods) Mn. MBh. &c. ; accomplished, complete, mature, full-grown (see a-pr°) ; (in med.) indicated, serving the purpose Suśr. ; (in gram.) obtained or following from a rule, valid (iti prâpte, “while this follows from a preceding rule”) Pāṇ. 1-1, 34 Sch. &c. ; fixed, placed L. ; proper, right L. ; ► p. 707c | ||
prâpta, m. pl. N. of a people MārkP. ► p. 707c | prâpta, m. pl. N. of a people MārkP. ► p. 707c | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
-prāpta, ppp. (= Skt. id., Pali -patta), in āścarya-, adbhuta-pr° generally means filled with astonishment and wonder (e. g. SP 188.5). But in SP 183.4-5 āścaryaprāptā ... adbhutaprāptā ime ṣoḍaśa śrāmaṇerāḥ, rather, some-thing like arrived at a wonderful thing or condition, marvel-ously successful. In KP 9.5 and 10.5 dāntājāneya-prāpta (bodhisattva), and KP 9.14; 10.17, 20 ājanya-prāpta (bodhisattva), clearly arrived at (the condition of being ...) i.e. become (tamed) noble (steeds, see ājanya, ājāneya). In most of these, Tib. renders prāpta by thob pa, which acc. to Jä. primarily means get, attain, but in expressions like saṅs rgyas thob pa become (lit. get) a Buddha. This latter seems clearly parallel to the use of -prāpta in these KP passages. Ordinarily a cpd. ending in -prāpta has as its prior member an abstract noun. Note however that some such prior members may be either abstract or concrete; thus adbhuta may mean either surprising or sur-prise. Possibly the KP usage arose by analogy of such compounds. There are other cpds. of prāpta with a pre-ceding adj.; see s.v. niṣkāṅkṣa. | -prāpta, ppp. (= Skt. id., Pali -patta), in āścarya-, adbhuta-pr° generally means filled with astonishment and wonder (e. g. SP 188.5). But in SP 183.4-5 āścaryaprāptā ... adbhutaprāptā ime ṣoḍaśa śrāmaṇerāḥ, rather, some-thing like arrived at a wonderful thing or condition, marvel-ously successful. In KP 9.5 and 10.5 dāntājāneya-prāpta (bodhisattva), and KP 9.14; 10.17, 20 ājanya-prāpta (bodhisattva), clearly arrived at (the condition of being ...) i.e. become (tamed) noble (steeds, see ājanya, ājāneya). In most of these, Tib. renders prāpta by thob pa, which acc. to Jä. primarily means get, attain, but in expressions like saṅs rgyas thob pa become (lit. get) a Buddha. This latter seems clearly parallel to the use of -prāpta in these KP passages. Ordinarily a cpd. ending in -prāpta has as its prior member an abstract noun. Note however that some such prior members may be either abstract or concrete; thus adbhuta may mean either surprising or sur-prise. Possibly the KP usage arose by analogy of such compounds. There are other cpds. of prāpta with a pre-ceding adj.; see s.v. niṣkāṅkṣa. | ||
第110行: | 第158行: | ||
==7、aprāpta== | ==7、aprāpta== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
a--prâpta | a--prâpta | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 ma rnyed pa,ma byon,ma song, ma phrad pa, phrad med, phrad pa med, ma thob pa,ma bab pa'i bar du | 〈藏〉 ma rnyed pa,ma byon,ma song, ma phrad pa, phrad med, phrad pa med, ma thob pa,ma bab pa'i bar du | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] ❶ 未至,未遇。❷ 未获得。❸ 未完成,未长成。❹(规则)无效的。〔古〕 未到,未得,不至,未至,所未得,無获,未至得。 | [形] ❶ 未至,未遇。❷ 未获得。❸ 未完成,未长成。❹(规则)无效的。〔古〕 未到,未得,不至,未至,所未得,無获,未至得。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
á-prâpta, mfn. unobtained ; unarrived ; not accomplished Yājñ. ii, 243 ; not yet full-grown Mn. ix, 88 ; not resulting (from any rule) Pāṇ. 8-2, 33 Sch. ► p. 59b | á-prâpta, mfn. unobtained ; unarrived ; not accomplished Yājñ. ii, 243 ; not yet full-grown Mn. ix, 88 ; not resulting (from any rule) Pāṇ. 8-2, 33 Sch. ► p. 59b | ||
==8、avihāni== | ==8、avihāni== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
avihāni | avihāni | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 mi nyams pa | 〈藏〉 mi nyams pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
〔古〕無退捨。 | |||
==9、ca== | ==9、ca== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
ca 一级词汇 | ca 一级词汇 | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 dang | 〈藏〉 dang | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[不变] 和,也,而且,并且,仍然。〔古〕 與,及。 | [不变] 和,也,而且,并且,仍然。〔古〕 與,及。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ca 1., the 20th letter of the alphabet, 1st of the 2nd (or palatal) class of consonants, having the sound of ch in church. ► p. 380a | ca 1., the 20th letter of the alphabet, 1st of the 2nd (or palatal) class of consonants, having the sound of ch in church. ► p. 380a | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ca 2., ind. and, both, also, moreover, as well as (= $, Lat. que, placed like these particles as an enclitic after the word which it connects with what precedes; when used with a personal pronoun this must appear in its fuller accented form (e.g. táva ca máma ca [not te ca me ca], “both of thee and me”) , when used after verbs the first of them is accented Pāṇ. 8-1, 58 f.; it connects whole sentences as well as parts of sentences; in RV. the double ca occurs more frequently than the single (e.g. aháṃ ca tváṃ ca, “I and thou,” viii, 62, 11); the double ca may also be used somewhat redundantly in class. Sanskṛit (e.g. kva hariṇakānāṃ jīvitaṃ câtilolaṃ kva ca vajra-sārāḥ śarās te, “where is the frail existence, of fawns and where are thy adamantine arrows?” Śak. i, 10); in later literature, however, the first ca is more usually omitted (e.g. ahaṃ tvaṃ ca), and when more than two things are enumerated only one ca is often found (e.g. tejasā yaśasā lakṣmyā sthityā ca parayā, “in glory, in fame, in beauty, and in high position” Nal. xii, 6); elsewhere, when more than two things are enumerated, ca is placed after some and omitted after others (e.g. ṛṇa-dātā ca vaidyaś ca śrotriyo nadī, “the payer of a debt and a physician [and] a Brāhman [and] a river” Hit. i, 4, 55); in Ved. and even in class. Sanskṛit [Mn. iii, 20; ix, 322 Hit.] , when the double ca would generally be used, the second may occasionally be omitted (e.g. indraś ca soma, “both Indra [and thou] Soma” RV. vii, 104, 25; durbhedyaś câśusaṃdheyaḥ, “both difficult to be divided [and] quickly united” Hit. i); with lexicographers camay imply a reference to certain other words which are not expressed (e.g. kamaṇḍalau ca karakaḥ, “the word karaka has the meaning “pitcher” and other meanings”); sometimes ca is = eva, even, indeed, certainly, just (e.g. su-cintitaṃ caûṣadhaṃ na nāma-mātreṇa karoty arogam, “even a well-devised remedy does not cure a disease by its mere name” Hit.; yāvanta eva te tāvāṃśca saḥ, “as great as they [were] just so great was he” Ragh. xii, 45); occasionally ca is disjunctive, “but,” “on the contrary,” “on the other hand,” “yet,” “nevertheless” (varam ādyau na cântimaḥ, “better the two first but not the last” Hit. ► p. 380b; śāntam idam āśrama-padaṃ sphurati ca bāhuḥ, “this hermitage is tranquil yet my arm throbs” Śak. i, 15); ca-ca, though-yet Vikr. ii, 9; ca-na ca, though - yet not Pat.; ca - na tu (v.l. nanu) id., Mālav. iv, 8; na ca - ca, though not - yet Pat.; ca may be used for vā, “either,” “or” (e.g. iha câmutra vā, “either here or hereafter” Mn. xii, 89; strī vā pumān vā yac cânyat sattvam, “either a woman or a man or any other being” R.) , and when a neg. particle is joined with ca the two may then be translated by “neither,” “nor;” occasionally one ca or one na is omitted (e.g. na ca paribhoktuṃ naîva śaknomi hātum, “I am able neither to enjoy nor to abandon” Śak. v, 18; na pūrvâhṇe na ca parâhṇe, “neither in the forenoon nor in the afternoon”); ca-ca may express immediate connection between two acts or their simultaneous occurrence (e.g. mama ca muktaṃ tamasā mano manasijena dhanuṣi śaraś ca niveśitaḥ, “no sooner is my mind freed from darkness than a shaft is fixed on his bow by the heart-born god,” vi, 8); ca is sometimes = cêd, “if” (cf. Pāṇ. 8-1, 30; the verb is accented) RV. AV.MBh. Vikr. ii, 20 Bhartṛ. ii, 45; ca may be used as an expletive (e.g. anyaiś ca kratubhiś ca, “and with other sacrifices”); cais often joined to an adv. like eva, api, tathā, tathaîva, &c., either with or without a neg. particle (e.g. vairiṇaṃ nôpaseveta sahâyaṃ caiva vairiṇaḥ, “one ought not to serve either an enemy or the ally of an enemy” Mn. iv, 133); (see eva, api, &c.) For the meaning of ca after an interrogative see 2. ká, 2. kathā́, kím, kvá); [cf. $, Lat. que, pe (in nempe &c.); Goth. uh ; Zd. ca ; Old Pers. cā.] ► p. 380a | ca 2., ind. and, both, also, moreover, as well as (= $, Lat. que, placed like these particles as an enclitic after the word which it connects with what precedes; when used with a personal pronoun this must appear in its fuller accented form (e.g. táva ca máma ca [not te ca me ca], “both of thee and me”) , when used after verbs the first of them is accented Pāṇ. 8-1, 58 f.; it connects whole sentences as well as parts of sentences; in RV. the double ca occurs more frequently than the single (e.g. aháṃ ca tváṃ ca, “I and thou,” viii, 62, 11); the double ca may also be used somewhat redundantly in class. Sanskṛit (e.g. kva hariṇakānāṃ jīvitaṃ câtilolaṃ kva ca vajra-sārāḥ śarās te, “where is the frail existence, of fawns and where are thy adamantine arrows?” Śak. i, 10); in later literature, however, the first ca is more usually omitted (e.g. ahaṃ tvaṃ ca), and when more than two things are enumerated only one ca is often found (e.g. tejasā yaśasā lakṣmyā sthityā ca parayā, “in glory, in fame, in beauty, and in high position” Nal. xii, 6); elsewhere, when more than two things are enumerated, ca is placed after some and omitted after others (e.g. ṛṇa-dātā ca vaidyaś ca śrotriyo nadī, “the payer of a debt and a physician [and] a Brāhman [and] a river” Hit. i, 4, 55); in Ved. and even in class. Sanskṛit [Mn. iii, 20; ix, 322 Hit.] , when the double ca would generally be used, the second may occasionally be omitted (e.g. indraś ca soma, “both Indra [and thou] Soma” RV. vii, 104, 25; durbhedyaś câśusaṃdheyaḥ, “both difficult to be divided [and] quickly united” Hit. i); with lexicographers camay imply a reference to certain other words which are not expressed (e.g. kamaṇḍalau ca karakaḥ, “the word karaka has the meaning “pitcher” and other meanings”); sometimes ca is = eva, even, indeed, certainly, just (e.g. su-cintitaṃ caûṣadhaṃ na nāma-mātreṇa karoty arogam, “even a well-devised remedy does not cure a disease by its mere name” Hit.; yāvanta eva te tāvāṃśca saḥ, “as great as they [were] just so great was he” Ragh. xii, 45); occasionally ca is disjunctive, “but,” “on the contrary,” “on the other hand,” “yet,” “nevertheless” (varam ādyau na cântimaḥ, “better the two first but not the last” Hit. ► p. 380b; śāntam idam āśrama-padaṃ sphurati ca bāhuḥ, “this hermitage is tranquil yet my arm throbs” Śak. i, 15); ca-ca, though-yet Vikr. ii, 9; ca-na ca, though - yet not Pat.; ca - na tu (v.l. nanu) id., Mālav. iv, 8; na ca - ca, though not - yet Pat.; ca may be used for vā, “either,” “or” (e.g. iha câmutra vā, “either here or hereafter” Mn. xii, 89; strī vā pumān vā yac cânyat sattvam, “either a woman or a man or any other being” R.) , and when a neg. particle is joined with ca the two may then be translated by “neither,” “nor;” occasionally one ca or one na is omitted (e.g. na ca paribhoktuṃ naîva śaknomi hātum, “I am able neither to enjoy nor to abandon” Śak. v, 18; na pūrvâhṇe na ca parâhṇe, “neither in the forenoon nor in the afternoon”); ca-ca may express immediate connection between two acts or their simultaneous occurrence (e.g. mama ca muktaṃ tamasā mano manasijena dhanuṣi śaraś ca niveśitaḥ, “no sooner is my mind freed from darkness than a shaft is fixed on his bow by the heart-born god,” vi, 8); ca is sometimes = cêd, “if” (cf. Pāṇ. 8-1, 30; the verb is accented) RV. AV.MBh. Vikr. ii, 20 Bhartṛ. ii, 45; ca may be used as an expletive (e.g. anyaiś ca kratubhiś ca, “and with other sacrifices”); cais often joined to an adv. like eva, api, tathā, tathaîva, &c., either with or without a neg. particle (e.g. vairiṇaṃ nôpaseveta sahâyaṃ caiva vairiṇaḥ, “one ought not to serve either an enemy or the ally of an enemy” Mn. iv, 133); (see eva, api, &c.) For the meaning of ca after an interrogative see 2. ká, 2. kathā́, kím, kvá); [cf. $, Lat. que, pe (in nempe &c.); Goth. uh ; Zd. ca ; Old Pers. cā.] ► p. 380a | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ca 3., mfn. pure L. ; moving to and fro L. ; mischievous L. ; seedless L. ; ► p. 380b | ca 3., mfn. pure L. ; moving to and fro L. ; mischievous L. ; seedless L. ; ► p. 380b | ||
ca, m. a thief. L. ; the moon L. ; a tortoise L. ; Śiva L. ► p. 380b | ca, m. a thief. L. ; the moon L. ; a tortoise L. ; Śiva L. ► p. 380b | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
(ca, as in normal ṣkt. (Bṛ; ṣpeyer, ṣkt. ṣynt. § 441b, Vṣṣ §282), is used (1) in sentences where a contrast seems implied, = tu, but: te caivaṃ vācaṃ bhāṣeran, tac ca bhaiṣajyam upanāmitaṃ na pibeyuḥ SP 321.10-11, on the one hand (ca) they would speak thus, and yet (ca; on the other hand) they would not drink the proffered remedy; (2) in the protasis of conditions, = yadi (acc. to Speyer, VSS l.c., 'in Vedic and older Skt.,' but this is too limited): deśayeyaṃ cāhaṃ dharmaṃ na vā deśayeyam LV 400.7, whether I preach the dharma or not — (the same result, as regards some people, Will ensue); śakraś ca (mss., Senart em. ce) me varaṃ dadyāt Mv iii.6.15, if Śakra should give me a boon —. (3) Acc. to Senart, MV i notes pp. 370, 501, 561, ca may introduce a following word, as 'proclitic', no longer enclitic; he says the same is authorized for Pali by the Mukhainattadīpanī, a comm. on Kaccāyana. Alleged cases are cited in Mv i.3.11; 57.10; 83.17 (? read 16?); 158.1; 241.13. In some of these.(e. g. 158.1) ca seems to me quite normal; in others the position may be peculiar, as sometimes it is in Pali, see Childers s.v., but I do not believe it ever introduces a following word or phrase; some of the passages cited are violently emended by Senart in other respects. The Pali Dictt. do not recognize the usage alleged by Senart, and I am not convinced that it occurs in BHS.) | (ca, as in normal ṣkt. (Bṛ; ṣpeyer, ṣkt. ṣynt. § 441b, Vṣṣ §282), is used (1) in sentences where a contrast seems implied, = tu, but: te caivaṃ vācaṃ bhāṣeran, tac ca bhaiṣajyam upanāmitaṃ na pibeyuḥ SP 321.10-11, on the one hand (ca) they would speak thus, and yet (ca; on the other hand) they would not drink the proffered remedy; (2) in the protasis of conditions, = yadi (acc. to Speyer, VSS l.c., 'in Vedic and older Skt.,' but this is too limited): deśayeyaṃ cāhaṃ dharmaṃ na vā deśayeyam LV 400.7, whether I preach the dharma or not — (the same result, as regards some people, Will ensue); śakraś ca (mss., Senart em. ce) me varaṃ dadyāt Mv iii.6.15, if Śakra should give me a boon —. (3) Acc. to Senart, MV i notes pp. 370, 501, 561, ca may introduce a following word, as 'proclitic', no longer enclitic; he says the same is authorized for Pali by the Mukhainattadīpanī, a comm. on Kaccāyana. Alleged cases are cited in Mv i.3.11; 57.10; 83.17 (? read 16?); 158.1; 241.13. In some of these.(e. g. 158.1) ca seems to me quite normal; in others the position may be peculiar, as sometimes it is in Pali, see Childers s.v., but I do not believe it ever introduces a following word or phrase; some of the passages cited are violently emended by Senart in other respects. The Pali Dictt. do not recognize the usage alleged by Senart, and I am not convinced that it occurs in BHS.) | ||
► p. 220-221 | ► p. 220-221 | ||
第154行: | 第236行: | ||
==10、parama== | ==10、parama== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
parama | parama | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | 〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | [形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | ||
[中] 最高存在,至高精神。(接⑦或用于多财复合后词) 以……为最高目标的,专注于,渴望于,一直。 | [中] 最高存在,至高精神。(接⑦或用于多财复合后词) 以……为最高目标的,专注于,渴望于,一直。 | ||
〔古〕 勝,最勝,極,最極,最爲殊勝,第一。 | 〔古〕 勝,最勝,極,最極,最爲殊勝,第一。 | ||
【例句】 | 【例句】 | ||
[中]《那罗传》: | [中]《那罗传》: | ||
tataś cintāparā dīnā vivarṇavadanā kṛśā | | tataś cintāparā dīnā vivarṇavadanā kṛśā | | ||
babhūva damayantī tu niḥśvāsaparamā tadā | | babhūva damayantī tu niḥśvāsaparamā tadā | | ||
于是可怜的达摩衍蒂常常发愣, | 于是可怜的达摩衍蒂常常发愣, | ||
面色无光而身形消瘦,不住地长吁短叹。 | 面色无光而身形消瘦,不住地长吁短叹。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
paramá, mf(ā)n. (superl. of pára) most distant, remotest, extreme, last RV. &c. &c. ; chief, highest, primary, most prominent or conspicuous ; best, most excellent, worst (°meṇa cetasā, with all the heart; °ma-kaṇṭhena, “with all the throat,” roaring, speaking aloud) ib. ; (with abl.) superior or inferior to, better or worse than MBh. R. ; ► p. 588a | paramá, mf(ā)n. (superl. of pára) most distant, remotest, extreme, last RV. &c. &c. ; chief, highest, primary, most prominent or conspicuous ; best, most excellent, worst (°meṇa cetasā, with all the heart; °ma-kaṇṭhena, “with all the throat,” roaring, speaking aloud) ib. ; (with abl.) superior or inferior to, better or worse than MBh. R. ; ► p. 588a | ||
paramá, m. N. of 2 authors Cat. ; ► p. 588a | paramá, m. N. of 2 authors Cat. ; ► p. 588a | ||
第176行: | 第274行: | ||
paramám, ind. yes, very well ; ► p. 588a | paramám, ind. yes, very well ; ► p. 588a | ||
paramá, n. (also parama- in comp.; see below) very much, excessively, excellently, in the highest degree MBh. Kāv. &c.► p. 588a | paramá, n. (also parama- in comp.; see below) very much, excessively, excellently, in the highest degree MBh. Kāv. &c.► p. 588a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
parama, m. or nt., a high number: °masya Gv 105.20.. Corresponds to mapara, nt., mavara, also savara (2)qqv. | parama, m. or nt., a high number: °masya Gv 105.20.. Corresponds to mapara, nt., mavara, also savara (2)qqv. | ||
► p. 319 | ► p. 319 | ||
第184行: | 第285行: | ||
==11、syāt== | ==11、syāt== | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
syāt, ind. (3. sg. Pot. of √1. as) it may be, perhaps, perchance (esp. used in Jaina works and occurring in 7 formulas, viz. 1. syād asti, “perhaps it is [under certain circumstances];” 2. syān nâsti, “perhaps it is not, &c.;” 3. syād asti ca nâsti ca, “perhaps it is and is not [under certain circumstances];” 4. syād avaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is not expressible in words;” 5. syād asti câvaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is and is not expressible in words;” 6. syān nâsti câvaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is not and is and is not expressible in words;” 7. syād asti ca nâsti câvaktavyaḥ) Sarvad. ► p. 1273b | syāt, ind. (3. sg. Pot. of √1. as) it may be, perhaps, perchance (esp. used in Jaina works and occurring in 7 formulas, viz. 1. syād asti, “perhaps it is [under certain circumstances];” 2. syān nâsti, “perhaps it is not, &c.;” 3. syād asti ca nâsti ca, “perhaps it is and is not [under certain circumstances];” 4. syād avaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is not expressible in words;” 5. syād asti câvaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is and is not expressible in words;” 6. syān nâsti câvaktavyaḥ, “perhaps it is not and is and is not expressible in words;” 7. syād asti ca nâsti câvaktavyaḥ) Sarvad. ► p. 1273b | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
syāt, siyāti (as in Pali, AMg. siyā; in only Jain Skt., see BR), perhaps; common at end of Jātaka stories, usually: syāt khalu (punar) bhikṣavaḥ yuṣmākam (rarely omitted) evam asyā (or asyāt), it may be, however, monks, that you may have the idea..., Mv ii.64.2; 68.13; 72.4, 8, 10; 81.17; 83.7; 89.1, 3, 6; 94.5, 8; 113.16; 114.3; 176.15; 219.4; iii.76.18, and often in Mv; so in Mv i.45.1, 5, 8, 11, read siyāti (§ 29.41; Senart siyā ti) punar.. . evam asya syāt; yasyeha pariśeṣaṃ syān (so mss. ii.3.7, in i.199.9 syā) nārīye (°yo) jīvitaṃ bhavet Mv i.199.9 = ii.3.7 (vs), of what woman there may be perchance remaining in this world a life (of ten months and seven days); Senart reads syā in both places and takes it for the pronoun asyāḥ, which seems to me impossible (§ 21.84). | syāt, siyāti (as in Pali, AMg. siyā; in only Jain Skt., see BR), perhaps; common at end of Jātaka stories, usually: syāt khalu (punar) bhikṣavaḥ yuṣmākam (rarely omitted) evam asyā (or asyāt), it may be, however, monks, that you may have the idea..., Mv ii.64.2; 68.13; 72.4, 8, 10; 81.17; 83.7; 89.1, 3, 6; 94.5, 8; 113.16; 114.3; 176.15; 219.4; iii.76.18, and often in Mv; so in Mv i.45.1, 5, 8, 11, read siyāti (§ 29.41; Senart siyā ti) punar.. . evam asya syāt; yasyeha pariśeṣaṃ syān (so mss. ii.3.7, in i.199.9 syā) nārīye (°yo) jīvitaṃ bhavet Mv i.199.9 = ii.3.7 (vs), of what woman there may be perchance remaining in this world a life (of ten months and seven days); Senart reads syā in both places and takes it for the pronoun asyāḥ, which seems to me impossible (§ 21.84). | ||
► p. 615 | ► p. 615 | ||
第193行: | 第299行: | ||
==12、parīndanā== | ==12、parīndanā== | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
parīndanā (also pari°; to next), the giving over, presenting: °nā- Dbh 95.10; 99.33; °nayā Vaj 20.5, 11 (Pargiter ap. Hoernle MR 179 pari°); °nāṃ Sukh 73.11; AsP 462.16. | parīndanā (also pari°; to next), the giving over, presenting: °nā- Dbh 95.10; 99.33; °nayā Vaj 20.5, 11 (Pargiter ap. Hoernle MR 179 pari°); °nāṃ Sukh 73.11; AsP 462.16. | ||
► p. 333 | ► p. 333 | ||
第200行: | 第308行: | ||
=vipulaḥ paramo 'tyanto 'viparyastaś [ca] cetasi | upakārāśayaḥ sthānaṃ yāne 'smin guṇapūritaḥ ||4|| = | =vipulaḥ paramo 'tyanto 'viparyastaś [ca] cetasi | upakārāśayaḥ sthānaṃ yāne 'smin guṇapūritaḥ ||4|| = | ||
【支译】廣大第一常 其心不顛倒 利益深心住 此乘功德滿 4 | 【支译】廣大第一常 其心不顛倒 利益深心住 此乘功德滿 4 | ||
【净译】於心廣最勝 至極無顛倒 利益意樂處 此乘功德滿 4 | 【净译】於心廣最勝 至極無顛倒 利益意樂處 此乘功德滿 4 | ||
==1、vipula== | ==1、vipula== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
vipula | vipula | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 zheng,yangs pa,rgya cher,rgya che ba,rgya chen po | 〈藏〉 zheng,yangs pa,rgya cher,rgya che ba,rgya chen po | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 宽阔的,丰富的。〔古〕 廣,大,廣大,廣长,弘廣,廣多。 | [形] 宽阔的,丰富的。〔古〕 廣,大,廣大,廣长,弘廣,廣多。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ví-pula, See s.v. ► p. 951b | ví-pula, See s.v. ► p. 951b | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
vi-pula, mf(ā)n. (prob. fr. pula = pura; cf. under √ pul) large, extensive, wide, great, thick, long (also of time), abundant, numerous, important, loud (as a noise), noble (as a race) PārGṛ. MBh. &c. ; ► p. 974c | vi-pula, mf(ā)n. (prob. fr. pula = pura; cf. under √ pul) large, extensive, wide, great, thick, long (also of time), abundant, numerous, important, loud (as a noise), noble (as a race) PārGṛ. MBh. &c. ; ► p. 974c | ||
vi-pula, m. a respectable man W. ; N. of a prince of the Sauvīras MBh. ; of a pupil of Deva-śarman (who guarded the virtue of Ruci, his preceptor's wife, when tempted by Indra during her husband's absence) MBh. ; of a son of Vasu-deva BhP. ; of a mountain (either Meru or the Himâlaya) Pur. ; ► p. 974c | vi-pula, m. a respectable man W. ; N. of a prince of the Sauvīras MBh. ; of a pupil of Deva-śarman (who guarded the virtue of Ruci, his preceptor's wife, when tempted by Indra during her husband's absence) MBh. ; of a son of Vasu-deva BhP. ; of a mountain (either Meru or the Himâlaya) Pur. ; ► p. 974c | ||
第220行: | 第341行: | ||
vi-pula, m. a form of the Āryā metre (in which the caesura is irregular; divided into 3 species, Ādi-, Antya-, and Ubhaya-vipulā) Col. ; (in music) a kind of measure Saṃgīt. ; ► p. 974c | vi-pula, m. a form of the Āryā metre (in which the caesura is irregular; divided into 3 species, Ādi-, Antya-, and Ubhaya-vipulā) Col. ; (in music) a kind of measure Saṃgīt. ; ► p. 974c | ||
vi-pula, n. a sort of building Gal. ► p. 974c | vi-pula, n. a sort of building Gal. ► p. 974c | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
vipula, (1) adj. (like udagra, q.v., a near-synonym in Skt.), appears to be used (at least once) in the mg. re-joiced, very happy: prītī (? so both edd.; v.l. °tyā, °tya; perh. read prityā, instr.?) udagrā vipulā sma jātāḥ SP 214.4 (vs); Tib. bdag cag (we) dgaḥ zhiṅ (being glad) mgu pa raṅs ba skyes (app. have become joyous and rejoiced), which points to this interpretation of vipulā; several mss. Read jātā, but against taking prītī as subject of jātā, and udagrā and vipulā as pred. adj., is the form sma ( = smas), as well as the Tib.; (2) (= Pali id.; also Vaipulya) n. of a mountain near Rājagṛha: Māy 5; 101. | vipula, (1) adj. (like udagra, q.v., a near-synonym in Skt.), appears to be used (at least once) in the mg. re-joiced, very happy: prītī (? so both edd.; v.l. °tyā, °tya; perh. read prityā, instr.?) udagrā vipulā sma jātāḥ SP 214.4 (vs); Tib. bdag cag (we) dgaḥ zhiṅ (being glad) mgu pa raṅs ba skyes (app. have become joyous and rejoiced), which points to this interpretation of vipulā; several mss. Read jātā, but against taking prītī as subject of jātā, and udagrā and vipulā as pred. adj., is the form sma ( = smas), as well as the Tib.; (2) (= Pali id.; also Vaipulya) n. of a mountain near Rājagṛha: Māy 5; 101. | ||
► p. 491-492 | ► p. 491-492 | ||
第227行: | 第351行: | ||
==2、parama== | ==2、parama== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
parama | parama | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | 〈藏〉 dam pa,mchog,mchog tu,lhur byed pa,lhur len pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | [形] 最高的,至高的,最好的。 | ||
[中] 最高存在,至高精神。(接⑦或用于多财复合后词) 以……为最高目标的,专注于,渴望于,一直。 | [中] 最高存在,至高精神。(接⑦或用于多财复合后词) 以……为最高目标的,专注于,渴望于,一直。 | ||
〔古〕 勝,最勝,極,最極,最爲殊勝,第一。 | 〔古〕 勝,最勝,極,最極,最爲殊勝,第一。 | ||
【例句】 | 【例句】 | ||
[中]《那罗传》: | [中]《那罗传》: | ||
tataś cintāparā dīnā vivarṇavadanā kṛśā | | tataś cintāparā dīnā vivarṇavadanā kṛśā | | ||
babhūva damayantī tu niḥśvāsaparamā tadā | | babhūva damayantī tu niḥśvāsaparamā tadā | | ||
于是可怜的达摩衍蒂常常发愣, | 于是可怜的达摩衍蒂常常发愣, | ||
面色无光而身形消瘦,不住地长吁短叹。 | 面色无光而身形消瘦,不住地长吁短叹。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
paramá, mf(ā)n. (superl. of pára) most distant, remotest, extreme, last RV. &c. &c. ; chief, highest, primary, most prominent or conspicuous ; best, most excellent, worst (°meṇa cetasā, with all the heart; °ma-kaṇṭhena, “with all the throat,” roaring, speaking aloud) ib. ; (with abl.) superior or inferior to, better or worse than MBh. R. ; ► p. 588a | paramá, mf(ā)n. (superl. of pára) most distant, remotest, extreme, last RV. &c. &c. ; chief, highest, primary, most prominent or conspicuous ; best, most excellent, worst (°meṇa cetasā, with all the heart; °ma-kaṇṭhena, “with all the throat,” roaring, speaking aloud) ib. ; (with abl.) superior or inferior to, better or worse than MBh. R. ; ► p. 588a | ||
paramá, m. N. of 2 authors Cat. ; ► p. 588a | paramá, m. N. of 2 authors Cat. ; ► p. 588a | ||
第249行: | 第388行: | ||
paramám, ind. yes, very well ; ► p. 588a | paramám, ind. yes, very well ; ► p. 588a | ||
paramá, n. (also parama- in comp.; see below) very much, excessively, excellently, in the highest degree MBh. Kāv. &c.► p. 588a | paramá, n. (also parama- in comp.; see below) very much, excessively, excellently, in the highest degree MBh. Kāv. &c.► p. 588a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
parama, m. or nt., a high number: °masya Gv 105.20.. Corresponds to mapara, nt., mavara, also savara (2)qqv. | parama, m. or nt., a high number: °masya Gv 105.20.. Corresponds to mapara, nt., mavara, also savara (2)qqv. | ||
► p. 319 | ► p. 319 | ||
第256行: | 第398行: | ||
==3、atyanta== | ==3、atyanta== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
aty-anta 三级词汇 | aty-anta 三级词汇 | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 gtan,gtan du,shin tu | 〈藏〉 gtan,gtan du,shin tu | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] ❶ 超限的,非常,极度。❷ 永远的,不断的。❸ 绝对的,彻底的,毕竟。〔古〕 恒,極,永,永時,毕竟,究竟。 | [形] ❶ 超限的,非常,极度。❷ 永远的,不断的。❸ 绝对的,彻底的,毕竟。〔古〕 恒,極,永,永時,毕竟,究竟。 | ||
〖atyantam〗〖atyantāya〗〖atyantatas〗[不变]永远地,彻底地,绝对地。〔古〕 永,極,常,一向,究竟,毕竟。 | 〖atyantam〗〖atyantāya〗〖atyantatas〗[不变]永远地,彻底地,绝对地。〔古〕 永,極,常,一向,究竟,毕竟。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
aty-anta, mfn. beyond the proper end or limit ; excessive, very great, very strong ; endless, unbroken, perpetual ; absolute, perfect ; ► p. 16c | aty-anta, mfn. beyond the proper end or limit ; excessive, very great, very strong ; endless, unbroken, perpetual ; absolute, perfect ; ► p. 16c | ||
aty-antam, ind. excessively, exceedingly, in perpetuity, absolutely, completely ; to the end ; ► p. 16c | aty-antam, ind. excessively, exceedingly, in perpetuity, absolutely, completely ; to the end ; ► p. 16c | ||
第271行: | 第423行: | ||
==4、aviparyasta== | ==4、aviparyasta== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
aviparyasta | aviparyasta | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 phyin ci ma log pa | 〈藏〉 phyin ci ma log pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
〔古〕無有颠倒。 | |||
==5、cetas== | ==5、cetas== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
cetas | cetas | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 sems | 〈藏〉 sems | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[中] 心,思想。〔古〕 心。 | [中] 心,思想。〔古〕 心。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
cétas, &c., °tāya &c. See √cit. ► p. 401c | cétas, &c., °tāya &c. See √cit. ► p. 401c | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
cétas, n. splendour RV. ; (Naigh. iii, 9) consciousness, intelligence, thinking soul, heart, mind VS. xxxiv, 3 AV. Mn. ix, xiiMBh. &c. (ifc. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c.) ; will AV. vi, 116, 3 TBr. iii, 1, 1, 7 ; cf. a-cetás, dabhrá-, prá-, laghu-, ví-, sá-, su-cétas. ► p. 398a | cétas, n. splendour RV. ; (Naigh. iii, 9) consciousness, intelligence, thinking soul, heart, mind VS. xxxiv, 3 AV. Mn. ix, xiiMBh. &c. (ifc. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c.) ; will AV. vi, 116, 3 TBr. iii, 1, 1, 7 ; cf. a-cetás, dabhrá-, prá-, laghu-, ví-, sá-, su-cétas. ► p. 398a | ||
==6、upakāra== | ==6、upakāra== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
upakāra | upakāra | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 phan btags p,phan pa | 〈藏〉 phan btags p,phan pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阳] 恩惠。〔古〕 恩,恩德。 | [阳] 恩惠。〔古〕 恩,恩德。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
upa-kāra, &c. See upa- √1. kṛ. ► p. 195a | upa-kāra, &c. See upa- √1. kṛ. ► p. 195a | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
upa-kāra, m. help, assistance, benefit, service, favour ; use, advantage MBh. Yājñ. Hit. Vikr. &c. ; (upakāre-√vṛt, to be of service to another R.) ; preparation, ornament, decoration, embellishment (as garlands suspended at gateways on festivals, flowers &c.) Suśr. L. ; ► p. 195b | upa-kāra, m. help, assistance, benefit, service, favour ; use, advantage MBh. Yājñ. Hit. Vikr. &c. ; (upakāre-√vṛt, to be of service to another R.) ; preparation, ornament, decoration, embellishment (as garlands suspended at gateways on festivals, flowers &c.) Suśr. L. ; ► p. 195b | ||
upa-kārī, f. a royal tent ; a palace ; a caravansery L. ► p. 195b | upa-kārī, f. a royal tent ; a palace ; a caravansery L. ► p. 195b | ||
第311行: | 第493行: | ||
==7、sthāna== | ==7、sthāna== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
sthāna | sthāna | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 'greng ba,gnas,gnas pa,gnas su gyur pa, sdod pa, brkyang ba | 〈藏〉 'greng ba,gnas,gnas pa,gnas su gyur pa, sdod pa, brkyang ba | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[中] ❶ 〈藏〉 'greng ba,gnas pa,sdod pa〔古〕 住,能住,所住。❷ 〈藏〉 gnas,gnas su gyur pa地点,位置。〔古〕 處,處所,所居處,道理,具,事。❸ 〈藏〉 brkyang ba伸。 | [中] ❶ 〈藏〉 'greng ba,gnas pa,sdod pa〔古〕 住,能住,所住。❷ 〈藏〉 gnas,gnas su gyur pa地点,位置。〔古〕 處,處所,所居處,道理,具,事。❸ 〈藏〉 brkyang ba伸。 | ||
【变形】 | 【变形】 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
sthāna, sthānin,sthāpaka,°pana &c. See p.1263. ► p. 1265b | sthāna, sthānin,sthāpaka,°pana &c. See p.1263. ► p. 1265b | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
sthā́na, n. (also said to be m. Siddh.) the act of standing, standing firmly, being fixed or stationary AV. &c. &c. ; position or posture of the body (in shooting &c.) R. ; staying, abiding, being in or on (loc. or comp.) Daś. Kām. Hariv. Sāh. ; storing-place or storage (of goods) Mn. viii, 401 ; firm bearing (of troops), sustaining a charge (as opp. to yuddha, “charging”) ib. vii, 190 ; state, condition (ifc. = “being in the state of”) Up. BhP. ; continued existence, continuance in the same state (i.e. in a kind of neutral state unmarked by loss or gain), continuing as or as long as (with instr.) MBh. R. BhP. ; a state of perfect tranquillity Sarvad. ; station, rank, office, appointment, dignity, degree MaitrUp. Mn. MBh. &c. ; place of standing or staying, any place, spot, locality, abode, dwelling, house, site (sthāne sthāne or sthāne sthāneṣu, “in different places,” “here and there”) RV. &c. &c. ; place or room, stead (sthāne with gen. or ifc. “in place of,” “instead of,” “in lieu of;” ripu-sthāne-√vṛt, “to act in the place of an enemy;” vilocana-sthāna-gata, “acting the part of eyes;” also sthāna ifc. = “taking the place of,” “acting as,” “representing” or “represented by” e.g. pitṛ-sth°, “acting as a father” or “represented by a father;” iyaṅ-uvaṅ-sthāna, “represented by iy or uv” [as īandū Pāṇ. 1-4, 4]; in Pāṇini's grammar the gen. case is often used alone, when the word sthāne has to be supplied e.g. hanter jaḥ, “ja is to be substituted in place of han,” i, 1, 49) AitBr. GṛŚrS. &c. ; place for, receptacle of (gen.) Mn. MBh. &c. ; proper or right place (sthāne, “in the right place or at the right time, seasonably, justly”) PañcavBr. &c. &c. (cf. g. svar-ādi) ; province, region, domain, sphere (of gods or virtuous men; said to be in one of three places, viz. “earth” or “atmosphere” or “heaven;” accord. to some that of virtuous Brāhmans is called Prājāpatya; of Kshatriyas, Aindra; of Vaiśyas, Māruta; of Śūdras, Gāndharva) Nir. VarBṛS. ; the main support or strength or chief constituent of a kingdom (said to be four, viz. “army,” “treasury,” “city,” “territory”) Mn. vii, 56 ; a stronghold, fortress Pañcat. ; the place or organ of utterance of any sound (said to be 8 in number, viz. kaṇṭha, “throat;” tālu, “palate;” mūrdhan, “top of palate;” danta, “teeth;” oṣṭha, “lips;” kaṇṭha-tālu, “throat and palate;” kaṇṭh'-oṣṭha, “throat and lips;” dant'-oṣṭha, “teeth and lips;” to which are added nāsikā, “nose,” said to be the place of utterance of true Anusvāra, and uras, “chest,” of Visarga) Pāṇ. 1-9 Sch. Prāt. Sarvad. ; any organ of sense (e.g. the eye) BhP. ; the pitch or key of the voice, note, tone (of which accord. to RPrāt., there are three [see mandra], or accord. to TPrāt., seven; vīnā cyutā sthānāt, “a lute out of tune”) ŚrS. Prāt. MBh. &c. ; shape, form, appearance (as of the moon) VarBṛS. ; the part or character of an actor MW. ; case, occurrence (nêdaṃ sthānaṃ vidyate, “this case does not occur”) Yājñ. Pañcat. Vajracch. ; occasion, opportunity for (gen. or comp.; °ne ind. “occasionally”) ŚrS. MBh. &c. ; cause or object of (gen. or comp. e.g. śulka-sthāna, “an object of toll;” pūjā- or mānya-sth°, “an object of honour;” also applied to persons; °ne ind. “because of,” “on account of”) MBh. Pañcat.Kathās. ; a section or division (e.g. of medicine) Car. Suśr. &c. ; an astrol. mansion or its subdivision VarBṛS. ; = kāryôtsarga, Śīl. ; an open place in a town, plain, square W. ; a holy place MW. ; an altar ib. ; N. of a Gandharva king R. ; ► p. 1263a | sthā́na, n. (also said to be m. Siddh.) the act of standing, standing firmly, being fixed or stationary AV. &c. &c. ; position or posture of the body (in shooting &c.) R. ; staying, abiding, being in or on (loc. or comp.) Daś. Kām. Hariv. Sāh. ; storing-place or storage (of goods) Mn. viii, 401 ; firm bearing (of troops), sustaining a charge (as opp. to yuddha, “charging”) ib. vii, 190 ; state, condition (ifc. = “being in the state of”) Up. BhP. ; continued existence, continuance in the same state (i.e. in a kind of neutral state unmarked by loss or gain), continuing as or as long as (with instr.) MBh. R. BhP. ; a state of perfect tranquillity Sarvad. ; station, rank, office, appointment, dignity, degree MaitrUp. Mn. MBh. &c. ; place of standing or staying, any place, spot, locality, abode, dwelling, house, site (sthāne sthāne or sthāne sthāneṣu, “in different places,” “here and there”) RV. &c. &c. ; place or room, stead (sthāne with gen. or ifc. “in place of,” “instead of,” “in lieu of;” ripu-sthāne-√vṛt, “to act in the place of an enemy;” vilocana-sthāna-gata, “acting the part of eyes;” also sthāna ifc. = “taking the place of,” “acting as,” “representing” or “represented by” e.g. pitṛ-sth°, “acting as a father” or “represented by a father;” iyaṅ-uvaṅ-sthāna, “represented by iy or uv” [as īandū Pāṇ. 1-4, 4]; in Pāṇini's grammar the gen. case is often used alone, when the word sthāne has to be supplied e.g. hanter jaḥ, “ja is to be substituted in place of han,” i, 1, 49) AitBr. GṛŚrS. &c. ; place for, receptacle of (gen.) Mn. MBh. &c. ; proper or right place (sthāne, “in the right place or at the right time, seasonably, justly”) PañcavBr. &c. &c. (cf. g. svar-ādi) ; province, region, domain, sphere (of gods or virtuous men; said to be in one of three places, viz. “earth” or “atmosphere” or “heaven;” accord. to some that of virtuous Brāhmans is called Prājāpatya; of Kshatriyas, Aindra; of Vaiśyas, Māruta; of Śūdras, Gāndharva) Nir. VarBṛS. ; the main support or strength or chief constituent of a kingdom (said to be four, viz. “army,” “treasury,” “city,” “territory”) Mn. vii, 56 ; a stronghold, fortress Pañcat. ; the place or organ of utterance of any sound (said to be 8 in number, viz. kaṇṭha, “throat;” tālu, “palate;” mūrdhan, “top of palate;” danta, “teeth;” oṣṭha, “lips;” kaṇṭha-tālu, “throat and palate;” kaṇṭh'-oṣṭha, “throat and lips;” dant'-oṣṭha, “teeth and lips;” to which are added nāsikā, “nose,” said to be the place of utterance of true Anusvāra, and uras, “chest,” of Visarga) Pāṇ. 1-9 Sch. Prāt. Sarvad. ; any organ of sense (e.g. the eye) BhP. ; the pitch or key of the voice, note, tone (of which accord. to RPrāt., there are three [see mandra], or accord. to TPrāt., seven; vīnā cyutā sthānāt, “a lute out of tune”) ŚrS. Prāt. MBh. &c. ; shape, form, appearance (as of the moon) VarBṛS. ; the part or character of an actor MW. ; case, occurrence (nêdaṃ sthānaṃ vidyate, “this case does not occur”) Yājñ. Pañcat. Vajracch. ; occasion, opportunity for (gen. or comp.; °ne ind. “occasionally”) ŚrS. MBh. &c. ; cause or object of (gen. or comp. e.g. śulka-sthāna, “an object of toll;” pūjā- or mānya-sth°, “an object of honour;” also applied to persons; °ne ind. “because of,” “on account of”) MBh. Pañcat.Kathās. ; a section or division (e.g. of medicine) Car. Suśr. &c. ; an astrol. mansion or its subdivision VarBṛS. ; = kāryôtsarga, Śīl. ; an open place in a town, plain, square W. ; a holy place MW. ; an altar ib. ; N. of a Gandharva king R. ; ► p. 1263a | ||
sthā́ne, ind., see sthāna , “occasionally” ; ► p. 1263a | sthā́ne, ind., see sthāna , “occasionally” ; ► p. 1263a | ||
sthā́ne, ind., see sthāna , “because of,” “on account of” ► p. 1263a | sthā́ne, ind., see sthāna , “because of,” “on account of” ► p. 1263a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
sthāna, nt. (in all these mgs. = Pali ṭhāna, but hardly Skt. sthāna except as indicated below), (1) point, matter, subject: (anyāṃ devāṃ) divyehi daśahi sthānehi abhibhavati, divyenāyuṣā (so with varṇena, sukhena, aiśvaryeṇa, parivāreṇa; rūpeṇa, divyehi śabdehi, gandhehi, rasehi, praṣṭavyehi) Mv i.337.15; similarly ii.190.13 (rūpehi for rūpeṇa, sparśehi for praṣṭavyehi); similarly Pali SN iv.275.2 (et alibi; here, dibbena āyunā, then vaṇṇena, sukhena, yasena, adhipateyyena; dibbehi rūpehi, saddehi, gandhehi, rasehi, phoṭṭhabbehi); in Mv iii.302.5, same with only pañcahi sthānehi, the first five above; five vidyāsthāna, see this, also called simply sthānāni, points, subjects (of learning); the fifth of these is śilpa(karma)-sthānavidyā, cf. Divy 109.21 (kuśalā) Bodhisattvāḥ teṣu teṣu śilpasthānakarmasthāneṣu, ... in various matters of arts and crafts; also RP 41.13 sarvaśilpasthānakarma-sthāna-vidhijñāḥ; in Karmav 64.7 mātāpitaraḥ pañca sthānāni pratyanuśaṃsamānāḥ (expecting five matters) putram icchanti, some other group than the vidyā-sthānāni must be meant, perh. the five ānisaṃsā of a virtuous man as in Pali DN ii.86.1 ff.; durdṛśam imaṃ sthānaṃ (hard to see thru is this subject), yad ... pratītyasamutpādaḥ Mv iii.314.4; (paravipattiḥ) saṃvejanīyaṃ sthānaṃ Divy 432.16, a matter that should be shuddered at; anākhyātam idaṃ sthānam SP 230.8-9, an article (of creed) not yet made known (Kern); dharma-nigūḍha-sthānam 233.12, secret article of the doctrine; anyatamānyatamat sthānam adhyāpadya Bhīk 23b.4, having violated one or another point (item, of the code of conduct); 24a.1; evaṃrūpaṃ sthānaṃ nādhyāpatsyase 24b.5; asmin sthāne, in (on) this point, subject, matter, SP 317.3; 318.11 (tathāgataḥ khalv asmin sthāne, on this subject, 'saṃpramoṣadharmā; Kern here wrongly in his position); atra sthāne 323.4; (2) much as in Skt. (BR s.v. sthāna, 1 w), underlying condition, occasion, virtually cause (cf. Pali DN comm. i.77.32 ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ): trayāṇāṃ sthānānāṃ saṃmukhībhāvāt (as a result of the presence of three things, conditions) putrā jāyante duhitaraś ca Divy 1.12, 15; (ṣaṇṇāṃ) sthānānām āścaryādbhuto loke prādurbhāvaḥ Av ii.55.2, of six conditions (or causes) is a marvelous and miraculous appearance in the world (they are then listed; the first is a Tathāgata, who in the story has just performed a miracle); na pramādasthānam asyopasaṃharati Bbh 15.24, he does not produce for him an occasion for heedless-ness; kaukṛtya-sthānaṃ SP 287.2, see kaukṛtya; (3) basis, cause, so organ, implement: tenaikaṃ daṇḍasthānaṃ pre-ṣitam Divy 531.11, he sent out an instrument of punishment = a punitive force or expedition (Index, an army corps; not plausible); similarly MSV ii.71.16; (4) in cpd. sthānāsthāna, (skandha-dhātv-āyatana-pratītyasamutpā-da-)-sthānāsthāna- Bbh 4.8, either possibilities and im-possibilities (see 5 below), or sound and unsound pro-positions or conclusions (regarding...), and so in other cases, see s.v. asthāna; in Pali CPD s.v. aṭṭhāna, and PTSD s.v. ṭhāna(ṭṭhāna); (5) occasion, hence possibility: sthānam etad vidyati yaṃ (it is quite possible that) ete mama (acc.) jīvitāto vyaparopayitvā (°pitvā, mss.)... Mv i.350.11; sthānam etaṃ vidyati yaṃ Sudarśanā upa-krameṇa ātmānaṃ māreyā ii.448.12; sthānam etad vidyate yat... Divy 109.14; 159.28; 175.27; 228.12; 273.16; 512.5; Gv 404.23, etc., common; (without yad) sthānaṃ (one ms. adds ca) me... Sudarśanā paribhavati Mv ii.491.19 (so mss., which however are confused); with neg. (cf. Pali n' etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati), referring to following, na etaṃ sthāna (so read with v.l., m.c.) vidyati, yatra... Mv iii.46.2 (vs); but usually to preceding, nedaṃ sthānaṃ vidyate Vaj 34.8; Mmk 395.3; naitat sth° vi° bbh 25.16; sthānam etan na saṃvidyate LV 215.19 (vs); iti naitat sthānaṃ vidyate SP 333.9. | sthāna, nt. (in all these mgs. = Pali ṭhāna, but hardly Skt. sthāna except as indicated below), (1) point, matter, subject: (anyāṃ devāṃ) divyehi daśahi sthānehi abhibhavati, divyenāyuṣā (so with varṇena, sukhena, aiśvaryeṇa, parivāreṇa; rūpeṇa, divyehi śabdehi, gandhehi, rasehi, praṣṭavyehi) Mv i.337.15; similarly ii.190.13 (rūpehi for rūpeṇa, sparśehi for praṣṭavyehi); similarly Pali SN iv.275.2 (et alibi; here, dibbena āyunā, then vaṇṇena, sukhena, yasena, adhipateyyena; dibbehi rūpehi, saddehi, gandhehi, rasehi, phoṭṭhabbehi); in Mv iii.302.5, same with only pañcahi sthānehi, the first five above; five vidyāsthāna, see this, also called simply sthānāni, points, subjects (of learning); the fifth of these is śilpa(karma)-sthānavidyā, cf. Divy 109.21 (kuśalā) Bodhisattvāḥ teṣu teṣu śilpasthānakarmasthāneṣu, ... in various matters of arts and crafts; also RP 41.13 sarvaśilpasthānakarma-sthāna-vidhijñāḥ; in Karmav 64.7 mātāpitaraḥ pañca sthānāni pratyanuśaṃsamānāḥ (expecting five matters) putram icchanti, some other group than the vidyā-sthānāni must be meant, perh. the five ānisaṃsā of a virtuous man as in Pali DN ii.86.1 ff.; durdṛśam imaṃ sthānaṃ (hard to see thru is this subject), yad ... pratītyasamutpādaḥ Mv iii.314.4; (paravipattiḥ) saṃvejanīyaṃ sthānaṃ Divy 432.16, a matter that should be shuddered at; anākhyātam idaṃ sthānam SP 230.8-9, an article (of creed) not yet made known (Kern); dharma-nigūḍha-sthānam 233.12, secret article of the doctrine; anyatamānyatamat sthānam adhyāpadya Bhīk 23b.4, having violated one or another point (item, of the code of conduct); 24a.1; evaṃrūpaṃ sthānaṃ nādhyāpatsyase 24b.5; asmin sthāne, in (on) this point, subject, matter, SP 317.3; 318.11 (tathāgataḥ khalv asmin sthāne, on this subject, 'saṃpramoṣadharmā; Kern here wrongly in his position); atra sthāne 323.4; (2) much as in Skt. (BR s.v. sthāna, 1 w), underlying condition, occasion, virtually cause (cf. Pali DN comm. i.77.32 ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ): trayāṇāṃ sthānānāṃ saṃmukhībhāvāt (as a result of the presence of three things, conditions) putrā jāyante duhitaraś ca Divy 1.12, 15; (ṣaṇṇāṃ) sthānānām āścaryādbhuto loke prādurbhāvaḥ Av ii.55.2, of six conditions (or causes) is a marvelous and miraculous appearance in the world (they are then listed; the first is a Tathāgata, who in the story has just performed a miracle); na pramādasthānam asyopasaṃharati Bbh 15.24, he does not produce for him an occasion for heedless-ness; kaukṛtya-sthānaṃ SP 287.2, see kaukṛtya; (3) basis, cause, so organ, implement: tenaikaṃ daṇḍasthānaṃ pre-ṣitam Divy 531.11, he sent out an instrument of punishment = a punitive force or expedition (Index, an army corps; not plausible); similarly MSV ii.71.16; (4) in cpd. sthānāsthāna, (skandha-dhātv-āyatana-pratītyasamutpā-da-)-sthānāsthāna- Bbh 4.8, either possibilities and im-possibilities (see 5 below), or sound and unsound pro-positions or conclusions (regarding...), and so in other cases, see s.v. asthāna; in Pali CPD s.v. aṭṭhāna, and PTSD s.v. ṭhāna(ṭṭhāna); (5) occasion, hence possibility: sthānam etad vidyati yaṃ (it is quite possible that) ete mama (acc.) jīvitāto vyaparopayitvā (°pitvā, mss.)... Mv i.350.11; sthānam etaṃ vidyati yaṃ Sudarśanā upa-krameṇa ātmānaṃ māreyā ii.448.12; sthānam etad vidyate yat... Divy 109.14; 159.28; 175.27; 228.12; 273.16; 512.5; Gv 404.23, etc., common; (without yad) sthānaṃ (one ms. adds ca) me... Sudarśanā paribhavati Mv ii.491.19 (so mss., which however are confused); with neg. (cf. Pali n' etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati), referring to following, na etaṃ sthāna (so read with v.l., m.c.) vidyati, yatra... Mv iii.46.2 (vs); but usually to preceding, nedaṃ sthānaṃ vidyate Vaj 34.8; Mmk 395.3; naitat sth° vi° bbh 25.16; sthānam etan na saṃvidyate LV 215.19 (vs); iti naitat sthānaṃ vidyate SP 333.9. | ||
► p. 610 | ► p. 610 | ||
第333行: | 第531行: | ||
==8、yāna== | ==8、yāna== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
yāna | yāna | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 theg pa,bzhon pa | 〈藏〉 theg pa,bzhon pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[中] ❶ 前进,行进,旅程。❷ 车乘,坐骑。〔古〕乘,骑乘,所乘,乘道,車乘,舆。 | [中] ❶ 前进,行进,旅程。❷ 车乘,坐骑。〔古〕乘,骑乘,所乘,乘道,車乘,舆。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
yāna, &c. See ► p. 849c. ► p. 851b | yāna, &c. See ► p. 849c. ► p. 851b | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
yā́na, mfn. leading, conducting (said of a road; “to” gen. or adv. in °trā́) RV. ; ► p. 849c | yā́na, mfn. leading, conducting (said of a road; “to” gen. or adv. in °trā́) RV. ; ► p. 849c | ||
yā́nī, f. a path, course TS. MaitrS. Kāṭh. (cf. g. gaurâdi) ; ► p. 849c | yā́nī, f. a path, course TS. MaitrS. Kāṭh. (cf. g. gaurâdi) ; ► p. 849c | ||
第352行: | 第562行: | ||
==9、guṇa== | ==9、guṇa== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
guṇa | guṇa | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 yon tan, bsgres pa | 〈藏〉 yon tan, bsgres pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阳] ❶ 〈藏〉 yon tan性质,品质,品德,美德,功德。〔古〕 德,功德,勝德,有德,勝功德。❷ 线,带子,弓弦,琴弦。❸ 〈藏〉 bsgres pa 倍。〔语〕二合元音。〔古〕 倍,倍數。❹ 策略。 | [阳] ❶ 〈藏〉 yon tan性质,品质,品德,美德,功德。〔古〕 德,功德,勝德,有德,勝功德。❷ 线,带子,弓弦,琴弦。❸ 〈藏〉 bsgres pa 倍。〔语〕二合元音。〔古〕 倍,倍數。❹ 策略。 | ||
【例句】 | 【例句】 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
guṇá, m. (√ grah Uṇ.) a single thread or strand of a cord or twine (e.g. tri-g° q.v.), string or thread, rope TS. vii Mṛicch.Kum. Ragh. ; a garland W. ; a bow-string R. iii, 33, 16 (cāpa-) Ragh. ix, 54 Ṛitus. Hit. ; (in geom.) a sinew ; the string of a musical instrument, chord Śiś. iv, 57: ifc. (f(ā). ) with numerals “fold, times” (see cátur-, tri-, daśa-, dví-, pañca-; rarely the numeral stands by itself along with guṇá [e.g. viśiṣṭo daśabhir guṇaiḥ, “of ten times higher value” Mn. ii, 85] AV. x, 8, 43MBh. iii, 15649 Hariv. 509; [guṇa = bhāga] Pāṇ. 5-2, 47 Kāś.) ; a multiplier, co-efficient (in alg.) ; subdivision, species, kind (e.g. gandhasya guṇāḥ, the different kinds of smell MBh. xii, 6847) ; the 6 subdivisions of action for a king in foreign politics (viz. peace, war, march, halt, stratagem, and recourse to the protection of a mightier king) Mn. vii, 160 Yājñ. i, 346MBh. ii, 155 ; = upâya (q.v., denoting the 4 ways of conquering an enemy) R. v, 81, 41 ; “requisite” see °ṇôpêta ; a secondary element, subordinate or unessential part of any action (e.g. sarva-guṇa mfn. “reaching to all subordinate parts,” hence “valid throughout” KātyŚr.) ŚāṅkhŚr. ĀśvŚr. KātyŚr. R. v, 1, 71 ; an auxiliary act ŚāṅkhBr. xxvi, 4 ; a secondary dish (opposed to anna i.e. rice or the chief dish), side-dish Mn. iii, 224 ff. ; (= -karman, in Gr.) the secondary or less immediate object of an action Pāṇ. 1-4, 51 Sch. ; a quality, peculiarity, attribute or property Lāṭy. ŚāṅkhGṛ. Mn. iii, ix, &c. ; an attribute of the 5 elements (each of which has its own peculiar quality or qualities as well as organ of sense; thus 1. ether has śabda, or sound for its Guṇa and the ear for its organ; 2. the air has tangibility and sound for its Guṇas and the skin for its organ; 3. fire or light has shape or colour, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the eye for its organs; 4. water has flavour, shape, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the tongue for its organ; 5. earth has the preceding Guṇas, with the addition of its own peculiar Guṇa of smell, and the nose for its organ) Mn. i, 20 and 76-78 MBh. xii, 6846 ff. Śak. i, 1 BhP. iii, 5, 35 ; (in Sāṃkhya phil.) an ingredient or constituent of Prakṛiti, chief quality of all existing beings (viz. sattva, rajas, and tamas i.e. goodness, passion, and darkness, or virtue, foulness, and ignorance; cf. RTL. pp. 31; 36; 163) Mn. i; iii, 40; xii, 24 ff.Sāṃkhyak. Bhag. xiii f. ; (hence) the number “three” VarBṛS. iic, 1 ; a property or characteristic of all created things (in Nyāya phil. twenty-four Guṇas are enumerated, viz. 1. rūpa, shape, colour; 2. rasa, savour; 3. gandha, odour; 4. sparśa, tangibility; 5. saṃkhyā, number; 6. parimāṇa, dimension; 7. pṛthaktva, severalty; 8. saṃyoga, conjunction; 9. vibhāga, disjunction; 10. paratva, remoteness; 11. aparatva, proximity; 12. gurutva, weight; 13. dravatva, fluidity; 14. sneha, viscidity; 15. śabda, sound; 16. buddhi or jñāna, understanding or knowledge; 17. sukha, pleasure; 18. duḥkha, pain; 19. icchā, desire; 20. dveṣa, aversion; 21. prayatna, effort; 22. dharma, merit or virtue; 23. adharma, demerit; 24. saṃskāra, the self-reproductive quality) ; an epithet KātyŚr. ; good quality, virtue, merit, excellence Mn. MBh. &c. ; also “power, might;” āt, “by virtue of,” “in consequence of,” “by means of” ; the merit of composition (consistency, elegance of expression, &c.) Kāvyâd. i, 41 f. Kpr. viii Sāh. viii ; the peculiar properties of the letters (11 in number, viz. the 8 bāhya-prayatnās [q.v.] and the 3 accents) Kāś. on Pāṇ. 1-1, 9 and 50 (cf. -mātra) ; the first gradation of a vowel, the vowels a (with ar, al Pāṇ. 1-1, 51), e, o Nir. x, 17 RPrāt. xi, 6 Pāṇ. ; an organ of sense L. ; a cook (cf. -kāra) L. ; Bhīma-sena (cf. -kāra) L. ; ► p. 357a | guṇá, m. (√ grah Uṇ.) a single thread or strand of a cord or twine (e.g. tri-g° q.v.), string or thread, rope TS. vii Mṛicch.Kum. Ragh. ; a garland W. ; a bow-string R. iii, 33, 16 (cāpa-) Ragh. ix, 54 Ṛitus. Hit. ; (in geom.) a sinew ; the string of a musical instrument, chord Śiś. iv, 57: ifc. (f(ā). ) with numerals “fold, times” (see cátur-, tri-, daśa-, dví-, pañca-; rarely the numeral stands by itself along with guṇá [e.g. viśiṣṭo daśabhir guṇaiḥ, “of ten times higher value” Mn. ii, 85] AV. x, 8, 43MBh. iii, 15649 Hariv. 509; [guṇa = bhāga] Pāṇ. 5-2, 47 Kāś.) ; a multiplier, co-efficient (in alg.) ; subdivision, species, kind (e.g. gandhasya guṇāḥ, the different kinds of smell MBh. xii, 6847) ; the 6 subdivisions of action for a king in foreign politics (viz. peace, war, march, halt, stratagem, and recourse to the protection of a mightier king) Mn. vii, 160 Yājñ. i, 346MBh. ii, 155 ; = upâya (q.v., denoting the 4 ways of conquering an enemy) R. v, 81, 41 ; “requisite” see °ṇôpêta ; a secondary element, subordinate or unessential part of any action (e.g. sarva-guṇa mfn. “reaching to all subordinate parts,” hence “valid throughout” KātyŚr.) ŚāṅkhŚr. ĀśvŚr. KātyŚr. R. v, 1, 71 ; an auxiliary act ŚāṅkhBr. xxvi, 4 ; a secondary dish (opposed to anna i.e. rice or the chief dish), side-dish Mn. iii, 224 ff. ; (= -karman, in Gr.) the secondary or less immediate object of an action Pāṇ. 1-4, 51 Sch. ; a quality, peculiarity, attribute or property Lāṭy. ŚāṅkhGṛ. Mn. iii, ix, &c. ; an attribute of the 5 elements (each of which has its own peculiar quality or qualities as well as organ of sense; thus 1. ether has śabda, or sound for its Guṇa and the ear for its organ; 2. the air has tangibility and sound for its Guṇas and the skin for its organ; 3. fire or light has shape or colour, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the eye for its organs; 4. water has flavour, shape, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the tongue for its organ; 5. earth has the preceding Guṇas, with the addition of its own peculiar Guṇa of smell, and the nose for its organ) Mn. i, 20 and 76-78 MBh. xii, 6846 ff. Śak. i, 1 BhP. iii, 5, 35 ; (in Sāṃkhya phil.) an ingredient or constituent of Prakṛiti, chief quality of all existing beings (viz. sattva, rajas, and tamas i.e. goodness, passion, and darkness, or virtue, foulness, and ignorance; cf. RTL. pp. 31; 36; 163) Mn. i; iii, 40; xii, 24 ff.Sāṃkhyak. Bhag. xiii f. ; (hence) the number “three” VarBṛS. iic, 1 ; a property or characteristic of all created things (in Nyāya phil. twenty-four Guṇas are enumerated, viz. 1. rūpa, shape, colour; 2. rasa, savour; 3. gandha, odour; 4. sparśa, tangibility; 5. saṃkhyā, number; 6. parimāṇa, dimension; 7. pṛthaktva, severalty; 8. saṃyoga, conjunction; 9. vibhāga, disjunction; 10. paratva, remoteness; 11. aparatva, proximity; 12. gurutva, weight; 13. dravatva, fluidity; 14. sneha, viscidity; 15. śabda, sound; 16. buddhi or jñāna, understanding or knowledge; 17. sukha, pleasure; 18. duḥkha, pain; 19. icchā, desire; 20. dveṣa, aversion; 21. prayatna, effort; 22. dharma, merit or virtue; 23. adharma, demerit; 24. saṃskāra, the self-reproductive quality) ; an epithet KātyŚr. ; good quality, virtue, merit, excellence Mn. MBh. &c. ; also “power, might;” āt, “by virtue of,” “in consequence of,” “by means of” ; the merit of composition (consistency, elegance of expression, &c.) Kāvyâd. i, 41 f. Kpr. viii Sāh. viii ; the peculiar properties of the letters (11 in number, viz. the 8 bāhya-prayatnās [q.v.] and the 3 accents) Kāś. on Pāṇ. 1-1, 9 and 50 (cf. -mātra) ; the first gradation of a vowel, the vowels a (with ar, al Pāṇ. 1-1, 51), e, o Nir. x, 17 RPrāt. xi, 6 Pāṇ. ; an organ of sense L. ; a cook (cf. -kāra) L. ; Bhīma-sena (cf. -kāra) L. ; ► p. 357a | ||
guṇā, f. Sanseviera Roxburghiana L. ; the plant māṃsarohiṇī L. ; N. of a princess Rājat. iv, 695 (cf. nir-, vi-, sa-; gauṇa.) ► p. 357a | guṇā, f. Sanseviera Roxburghiana L. ; the plant māṃsarohiṇī L. ; N. of a princess Rājat. iv, 695 (cf. nir-, vi-, sa-; gauṇa.) ► p. 357a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
guṇa, (1) m. (Skt. and Pali id., not recorded in this use), advantage: Mv i.155.7 (vs) kaṃ vā guṇaṃ karoti, or what good does it do? what use is it?; (2) m. (= Pali guṇa), cluster, bouquet, garland: LV 214.19 (vs) sugan-dhamālāṃ guṇapuṣpasaṃcayāṃ (acc. pl.), bunches of flowers in clusters, of garlanded flowers; kaṇṭhe-guṇa, see this; mālā-guṇa-parikṣiptaḥ Mvy 9463. See also antra-guṇa (in which guṇa may perhaps mean lit. garland, chain, i.e. of the intestines). | guṇa, (1) m. (Skt. and Pali id., not recorded in this use), advantage: Mv i.155.7 (vs) kaṃ vā guṇaṃ karoti, or what good does it do? what use is it?; (2) m. (= Pali guṇa), cluster, bouquet, garland: LV 214.19 (vs) sugan-dhamālāṃ guṇapuṣpasaṃcayāṃ (acc. pl.), bunches of flowers in clusters, of garlanded flowers; kaṇṭhe-guṇa, see this; mālā-guṇa-parikṣiptaḥ Mvy 9463. See also antra-guṇa (in which guṇa may perhaps mean lit. garland, chain, i.e. of the intestines). | ||
► p. 212 | ► p. 212 | ||
第370行: | 第592行: | ||
==10、pūrita== | ==10、pūrita== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
pūrita | pūrita | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[过分] 充满,覆盖。 | [过分] 充满,覆盖。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
pūrita, mfn. filled, completed &c. ; made full or strong, intensified (as a sound) MBh. ; filled with wind, blown (as a conch) BhP. ; multiplied, overspread W. ► p. 642a | pūrita, mfn. filled, completed &c. ; made full or strong, intensified (as a sound) MBh. ; filled with wind, blown (as a conch) BhP. ; multiplied, overspread W. ► p. 642a | ||
第382行: | 第611行: | ||
=dānaṃ pāramitāṣatkam āmiṣābhayadharmataḥ | ekadvayatrayeṇeha pratipat sā 'pratiṣṭhitā || 5= | =dānaṃ pāramitāṣatkam āmiṣābhayadharmataḥ | ekadvayatrayeṇeha pratipat sā 'pratiṣṭhitā || 5= | ||
【支译】檀義攝於六 資生無畏法 此中一二三 名為修行住 5 | 【支译】檀義攝於六 資生無畏法 此中一二三 名為修行住 5 | ||
【净译】六度皆名施 由財無畏法 此中一二三 名修行不住 5 | 【净译】六度皆名施 由財無畏法 此中一二三 名修行不住 5 | ||
==1、dāna== | ==1、dāna== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
dāna | dāna | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈巴〉 dāna | 〈巴〉 dāna | ||
〈藏〉 byin pa,sbyin pa,'bul ba,byin par byed pa,sbyin par byed pa,sbyin du 'jug pa | 〈藏〉 byin pa,sbyin pa,'bul ba,byin par byed pa,sbyin par byed pa,sbyin du 'jug pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[中] ❶ 布施。〔古〕 捨,與,施,布施,能施,行施,惠捨,惠施,行惠施,施與,應施,奉施,勤施,與作。❷(大象的)颞颥液汁。 | [中] ❶ 布施。〔古〕 捨,與,施,布施,能施,行施,惠捨,惠施,行惠施,施與,應施,奉施,勤施,與作。❷(大象的)颞颥液汁。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dāna 3., n. purification L. ► p. 475a | dāna 3., n. purification L. ► p. 475a | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dāná 1., n. the act of giving RV. ŚBr. MBh. &c. ; giving in marriage (cf. kanyā-) ; giving up (cf. prāṇa-, ātma-, śarīra- Pañc. ii) ; communicating, imparting, teaching (cf. brakma-) ; paying back, restoring Mn. Yājñ. ; adding, addition (VarBṛS.) ; donation, gift [Lat. donum] RV. ŚBr. &c. (°naṃdā, to offer a gift Mn. Yājñ. Hit. &c.; °nam prayam, to bestow a gift Mn. iv, 234) ; oblation (cf. udaka-, havir-) ; liberality (cf. 2. dāna) ; bribery Mn. vii, 198 (cf. upâya). ► p. 474a | dāná 1., n. the act of giving RV. ŚBr. MBh. &c. ; giving in marriage (cf. kanyā-) ; giving up (cf. prāṇa-, ātma-, śarīra- Pañc. ii) ; communicating, imparting, teaching (cf. brakma-) ; paying back, restoring Mn. Yājñ. ; adding, addition (VarBṛS.) ; donation, gift [Lat. donum] RV. ŚBr. &c. (°naṃdā, to offer a gift Mn. Yājñ. Hit. &c.; °nam prayam, to bestow a gift Mn. iv, 234) ; oblation (cf. udaka-, havir-) ; liberality (cf. 2. dāna) ; bribery Mn. vii, 198 (cf. upâya). ► p. 474a | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dā́na 2., n. cutting off, splitting, dividing L. ; pasture, meadow RV. ; rut-fluid (which flows from an elephant's temples) MBh. Hariv. &c. ; ► p. 474c | dā́na 2., n. cutting off, splitting, dividing L. ; pasture, meadow RV. ; rut-fluid (which flows from an elephant's temples) MBh. Hariv. &c. ; ► p. 474c | ||
dāná, m. (only in RV. but cf. vasu-) distribution of food or of a sacrificial meal ; imparting, communicating, liberality ; part, share, possession ; distributor, dispenser RV. vii, 27, 4. ► p. 474c | dāná, m. (only in RV. but cf. vasu-) distribution of food or of a sacrificial meal ; imparting, communicating, liberality ; part, share, possession ; distributor, dispenser RV. vii, 27, 4. ► p. 474c | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
(dāna, nt., Skt., gift; as one of the four saṃgraha-vastu, q.v.) | (dāna, nt., Skt., gift; as one of the four saṃgraha-vastu, q.v.) | ||
► p. 263 | ► p. 263 | ||
第410行: | 第659行: | ||
==2、pāramitā== | ==2、pāramitā== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
pāramitā | pāramitā | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈犍〉 paramada | 〈犍〉 paramada | ||
〈巴〉 pāramī, pāramitā | 〈巴〉 pāramī, pāramitā | ||
〈藏〉 pha rol tu phyin pa | 〈藏〉 pha rol tu phyin pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阴] 最极,最究竟性,至究竟,到彼岸。〔古〕到彼岸,度,度無極,波羅蜜,波羅蜜多,事究竟。 | [阴] 最极,最究竟性,至究竟,到彼岸。〔古〕到彼岸,度,度無極,波羅蜜,波羅蜜多,事究竟。 | ||
【变形】 | 【变形】 | ||
==3、ṣaṭka== | ==3、ṣaṭka== | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ṣaṭka, mfn. consisting of six Lāṭy. RPrāt. Śuśr. &c. (dvi-ṣaṭka = 12 MBh.) ; bought for six &c. Pāṇ. v, 1, 22 ; occurring for the sixth time, doing anything for the sixth time ib. v, 2, 77 Vārtt. ; ► p. 1108c | ṣaṭka, mfn. consisting of six Lāṭy. RPrāt. Śuśr. &c. (dvi-ṣaṭka = 12 MBh.) ; bought for six &c. Pāṇ. v, 1, 22 ; occurring for the sixth time, doing anything for the sixth time ib. v, 2, 77 Vārtt. ; ► p. 1108c | ||
ṣaṭka, m. six Gaṇit. ► p. 1108c | ṣaṭka, m. six Gaṇit. ► p. 1108c | ||
ṣaṭka, n. a hexade or aggregate of six (ifc. after another numeral e.g. nava-ṣaṭka, “consisting of nine hexades”) Nir. ĀśvŚr. MBh. &c. ; the six passions collectively (viz. kāma, mada, māna, lobha, harṣa, and ruṣā) L. ► p. 1108c | ṣaṭka, n. a hexade or aggregate of six (ifc. after another numeral e.g. nava-ṣaṭka, “consisting of nine hexades”) Nir. ĀśvŚr. MBh. &c. ; the six passions collectively (viz. kāma, mada, māna, lobha, harṣa, and ruṣā) L. ► p. 1108c | ||
==4、āmiṣa== | ==4、āmiṣa== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
āmiṣa | āmiṣa | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 'du 'dzi,zang zing,zang zing 'thob pa,zang zing dang bcas pa | 〈藏〉 'du 'dzi,zang zing,zang zing 'thob pa,zang zing dang bcas pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[中] 肉,食物,猎物,资财;贪欲。〔古〕 財,財贪,財物,財利,財食,爱染,有染。 | [中] 肉,食物,猎物,资财;贪欲。〔古〕 財,財贪,財物,財利,財食,爱染,有染。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
āmiṣa, See s.v. ► p. 146b | āmiṣa, See s.v. ► p. 146b | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
āmiṣa, n. (probably connected with 1. āma; fr. √2. miṣ, “to wet” T.), flesh MBh. Mn. Pañcat. Hit. Ragh. &c. ; food, meat, prey ; an object of enjoyment, a pleasing or beautiful object &c. Mn. Ragh. Kathās. &c. ; coveting, longing for ; lust, desire; a gift, boon, fee L. ; ► p. 147a | āmiṣa, n. (probably connected with 1. āma; fr. √2. miṣ, “to wet” T.), flesh MBh. Mn. Pañcat. Hit. Ragh. &c. ; food, meat, prey ; an object of enjoyment, a pleasing or beautiful object &c. Mn. Ragh. Kathās. &c. ; coveting, longing for ; lust, desire; a gift, boon, fee L. ; ► p. 147a | ||
āmiṣī, f. N. of a plant L. ► p. 147a | āmiṣī, f. N. of a plant L. ► p. 147a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
āmiṣa, nt. (except for the strange āmiṣā Mvy 6753; the BHS word also has its Skt. meanings, as well as those listed here, in which it = Pali āmisa; even in Skt. a few occurrences approach this sphere of use, cf. BR s.v., Alles worüber man mit Gier herfällt), lit. or orig. (the) flesh (contrasting with dharma, as in Pali with dhamma, the spirit); worldly things, possessions, or enjoyments, as contrasted with religious or spiritual ones (dharma): Mvy 6753 āmiṣā (! so also Mironov) = Tib. zaṅ ziṅ, matter, object, goods; external goods, earthly possessions (contrasted with internal, spiritual gifts); also śa, meat, and zas, food; sāmiṣaḥ, q.v., Mvy 6751, and nirāmiṣaḥ, q.v., Mvy 6752 (here āmiṣa = Tib. zaṅ ziṅ, only); dual dvandva dharmāmiṣa, spiritual and worldly things, °ṣābhyāṃ yathāśaktyā saṃgrāhakaś ca Bbh 254.21; °ṣābhyāṃ dāne 'matsariṇo Sukh 61.5; atha dharma-miṣam iti bhagavan kaḥ padārthaḥ Laṅk 179.17; āmiṣam Laṅk 180.6, defined at length in 6-13 as including what leads to longing (tṛṣṇā, 10) and rebirth, away from the religious goal; cf. āmiṣasaṃgraho bhavati na dharmasaṃ-graha iti 179.16; lokāmiṣasaṃgraho bhavati na dharma-saṃgraha iti 173.5; lokāmiṣa-phalābhilāṣiṇo (gen. sg.) vā punaḥ lokāmiṣanimittaṃ tathāgatacaityapūjā Bbh 22.25-26; dharmasaṃbhoga āmiṣasaṃbhogo Divy 93.1 spiritual and worldly enjoyment; in Mv iii.55.1, 3 Mahākāśyapa is described as the Lord's dharmajo dharmanirmito dharma-dāyādo na āmiṣadāyādo, spiritually born, spiritually fash-ioned spiritual heir, not physical (or worldly) heir (Pali also uses dhamma- and āmisa-dāyāda); āmiṣalolupaḥ puṅgalo ... bodhisattvena na sevitavyaḥ RP 19.1; apy oṣitā āmiṣapātracīvare (so prob. divide, see oṣita) RP 19.10; āmiṣa-priyāś RP 34.2 fond of worldly things; āmiṣa-guruka-sya RP 35.2 devoted to ... ; nāmiṣaprakṣiptayā samtatyā Śikṣ 128.7, with mental disposition (see saṃtati) not intent on worldly (or material) things; āmiṣa-kiṃcitka, see kiṃ-citka; na labhyaṃ bhikṣavas tenāmiṣeṇāmiṣakṛtyaṃ kartum MSV i.249.12, it is not allowable to pursue enjoyment with this worldly enjoyment (sugar added to food). | āmiṣa, nt. (except for the strange āmiṣā Mvy 6753; the BHS word also has its Skt. meanings, as well as those listed here, in which it = Pali āmisa; even in Skt. a few occurrences approach this sphere of use, cf. BR s.v., Alles worüber man mit Gier herfällt), lit. or orig. (the) flesh (contrasting with dharma, as in Pali with dhamma, the spirit); worldly things, possessions, or enjoyments, as contrasted with religious or spiritual ones (dharma): Mvy 6753 āmiṣā (! so also Mironov) = Tib. zaṅ ziṅ, matter, object, goods; external goods, earthly possessions (contrasted with internal, spiritual gifts); also śa, meat, and zas, food; sāmiṣaḥ, q.v., Mvy 6751, and nirāmiṣaḥ, q.v., Mvy 6752 (here āmiṣa = Tib. zaṅ ziṅ, only); dual dvandva dharmāmiṣa, spiritual and worldly things, °ṣābhyāṃ yathāśaktyā saṃgrāhakaś ca Bbh 254.21; °ṣābhyāṃ dāne 'matsariṇo Sukh 61.5; atha dharma-miṣam iti bhagavan kaḥ padārthaḥ Laṅk 179.17; āmiṣam Laṅk 180.6, defined at length in 6-13 as including what leads to longing (tṛṣṇā, 10) and rebirth, away from the religious goal; cf. āmiṣasaṃgraho bhavati na dharmasaṃ-graha iti 179.16; lokāmiṣasaṃgraho bhavati na dharma-saṃgraha iti 173.5; lokāmiṣa-phalābhilāṣiṇo (gen. sg.) vā punaḥ lokāmiṣanimittaṃ tathāgatacaityapūjā Bbh 22.25-26; dharmasaṃbhoga āmiṣasaṃbhogo Divy 93.1 spiritual and worldly enjoyment; in Mv iii.55.1, 3 Mahākāśyapa is described as the Lord's dharmajo dharmanirmito dharma-dāyādo na āmiṣadāyādo, spiritually born, spiritually fash-ioned spiritual heir, not physical (or worldly) heir (Pali also uses dhamma- and āmisa-dāyāda); āmiṣalolupaḥ puṅgalo ... bodhisattvena na sevitavyaḥ RP 19.1; apy oṣitā āmiṣapātracīvare (so prob. divide, see oṣita) RP 19.10; āmiṣa-priyāś RP 34.2 fond of worldly things; āmiṣa-guruka-sya RP 35.2 devoted to ... ; nāmiṣaprakṣiptayā samtatyā Śikṣ 128.7, with mental disposition (see saṃtati) not intent on worldly (or material) things; āmiṣa-kiṃcitka, see kiṃ-citka; na labhyaṃ bhikṣavas tenāmiṣeṇāmiṣakṛtyaṃ kartum MSV i.249.12, it is not allowable to pursue enjoyment with this worldly enjoyment (sugar added to food). | ||
► p. 100 | ► p. 100 | ||
第449行: | 第727行: | ||
==5、abhaya== | ==5、abhaya== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
a-bhaya | a-bhaya | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 'jigs pa med pa,mi 'jigs pa | 〈藏〉 'jigs pa med pa,mi 'jigs pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
〔古〕無畏。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
á-bhaya, mf(ā)n. unfearful, not dangerous, secure ; ► p. 60c | á-bhaya, mf(ā)n. unfearful, not dangerous, secure ; ► p. 60c | ||
a-bháya, mfn. fearless, undaunted ŚBr. xiv ; ► p. 60c | a-bháya, mfn. fearless, undaunted ŚBr. xiv ; ► p. 60c | ||
á-bhaya, m. N. of Śiva ; of a natural son of Bimbisāra ; of a son of Idhmajihva BhP. ; of a river in Krauñcadvīpa BhP. ; ► p. 60c | á-bhaya, m. N. of Śiva ; of a natural son of Bimbisāra ; of a son of Idhmajihva BhP. ; of a river in Krauñcadvīpa BhP. ; ► p. 60c | ||
á-bhayā, f. the plant Terminalia Chebula ; ► p. 60c | á-bhayā, f. the plant Terminalia Chebula ; ► p. 60c | ||
á-bhaya, n. (ifc. f(ā).) absence or removal of fear, peace, safety, security RV. &c. (cf. ábhaya-tama below) ; “safety,” (applied as proper name to) a child of Dharma and his reign in Plakshadvīpa BhP. ; a kind of symbol procuring security Hcat. ; a sacrificial hymn recited to obtain personal security Kauś. ; the root of a fragrant grass, Andropogon Muricatum. ► p. 60c | á-bhaya, n. (ifc. f(ā).) absence or removal of fear, peace, safety, security RV. &c. (cf. ábhaya-tama below) ; “safety,” (applied as proper name to) a child of Dharma and his reign in Plakshadvīpa BhP. ; a kind of symbol procuring security Hcat. ; a sacrificial hymn recited to obtain personal security Kauś. ; the root of a fragrant grass, Andropogon Muricatum. ► p. 60c | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
Abhaya, m. (1) n. of a king of Kaliṅga, converted by Buddha: Mv 1.178.11; 180.6, 9; (2) n. of a sārthavāha: Mv ii.2.11; (3) n. of a former Buddha: Mv iii.237.1f.; (4) n. of a people (? cf. Kirfel, Kosm. 76); sc. lipi, the script used by them: Mv i.135.7, read ramaṭhābhaya- for text ramaṭha-bhaya- (v.l. cama°); (5)n. of a son of King Bimbisāra and Āmrapālī (not corresponding exactly to Pali Abhaya, either 2 or 3 in DPPN, but perhaps a confusion of the two): MSV ii.22.20 ff. | Abhaya, m. (1) n. of a king of Kaliṅga, converted by Buddha: Mv 1.178.11; 180.6, 9; (2) n. of a sārthavāha: Mv ii.2.11; (3) n. of a former Buddha: Mv iii.237.1f.; (4) n. of a people (? cf. Kirfel, Kosm. 76); sc. lipi, the script used by them: Mv i.135.7, read ramaṭhābhaya- for text ramaṭha-bhaya- (v.l. cama°); (5)n. of a son of King Bimbisāra and Āmrapālī (not corresponding exactly to Pali Abhaya, either 2 or 3 in DPPN, but perhaps a confusion of the two): MSV ii.22.20 ff. | ||
► p. 49 | ► p. 49 | ||
第469行: | 第763行: | ||
==6、dharmatā== | ==6、dharmatā== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
dharmatā | dharmatā | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 chos nyid,chos | 〈藏〉 chos nyid,chos | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阴] 法性。〔古〕法,法爾,法性。 | [阴] 法性。〔古〕法,法爾,法性。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dhárma-tā, f. essence, inherent nature Buddh. ; the being law or right Jātakam. ; ► p. 511a | dhárma-tā, f. essence, inherent nature Buddh. ; the being law or right Jātakam. ; ► p. 511a | ||
dhárma-tayā, ind. ifc. by way or means of. Divyâv. ► p. 511a | dhárma-tayā, ind. ifc. by way or means of. Divyâv. ► p. 511a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dharmatā (= Pali dhammatā), natural and normal custom, habit, natural condition, what is to be expected, normal state, rule, standard custom, ordinary thing; (as in Pali) often in n. sg., frequently at the beginning of a sentence and often followed by khalu (sometimes hi), (you are to know that) it is the regular thing, often then gen. of person, as e. g. buddhānāṃ, rarely loc., and a clause stating what the 'regular thing' is; but sometimes also referring to what precedes: dharmatā (usually foll. by khalu or hi) ... Mv i.338.19 ( ... (i)yaṃ teṣāṃ sattvānāṃ ... ); iii.255.17 ( ... buddhānāṃ ... ); Divy 3.2; 18.8;' 67.16, etc.; Av i.4.6; 10.6, etc.; Jm 88.3; 98.16; iyam atra dharmatā LV 219.5; RP 10.9; dharmatā hy eṣā dharmāṇāṃ Laṅk 9.4 (vs), for this is the normal condition of states-of-existence; lokahitāna dharmatā SP 392.2 (vs); buddhānāṃ eṣā (read with v.l. eṣa, m.c.) dharmatā Mv iii.327.12 (vs); loc, eṣa buddheṣu dharmatā Ud xxi.12 (same vs with gen. in Pali AN ii.21.22); dharmatā-pratilambha eṣa caramabhā-vikānāṃ bodhisattvānāṃ ... LV 161.12 (here I fail to see that -pratilambha adds anything in particular; the cpd. seems to mean about the same as dharmatā alone, it is the established, normal procedure ... ); (bodhisattva-sya ... ) abhijñādharmatā LV 85.10, normal state of (having the) abhijñā; dharmatā-prāpta Mv i.301.8, arrived at the normal (correct, to-be-expected) state, said of the mind of a Pratyekabuddha; pratyātma-dharmatā-śuddhaṃ (nayaṃ) Laṅk 8.1 (vs); śruṇuya yo ti dharmatāṃ LV 54.2 (vs), who ever hears your true nature (regular procedure; contrasted with one who just sees or listens, i.e. to a few words); lokānuvartanakriyā-dharmatāṃ anuvartya LV 179.18; jarādharmatāyām anatītāḥ Mv ii.151.7, not free from (subjection to) the normal condition of old age; jāti-dharmatāyāḥ (abl.) Av i.211.15, from the normal condition of birth; instr., by the method (means) of ... , by way of ... . (śatana-patana-vikiraṇa-) vidhvaṃsana-dharmatayā Divy 180.24; 281.31; atyantakṣīṇakṣaya-dharmatayā (so, as cpd.) niruddhāḥ LV 419.16 (vs), Tib. śin tu zad ciṅ byaṅ baḥi chos-ñid-kyis (dharmatayā) ni ḥgags; paramagatigato 'si dharmatāye Mv iii.381.8, you have gone to the highest goal according to your natural, normal procedure; dharmatāṃ vā pratisaraty Bbh 255.13, see pratisarati. In Bhad 3 Leumann interprets dharmata-dhātuṃ as m.c. for dhar-matā-dh° which he assumes = dharma-dh°; but dharmata is rather for °taḥ, abl. of dharma, as a separate word. | dharmatā (= Pali dhammatā), natural and normal custom, habit, natural condition, what is to be expected, normal state, rule, standard custom, ordinary thing; (as in Pali) often in n. sg., frequently at the beginning of a sentence and often followed by khalu (sometimes hi), (you are to know that) it is the regular thing, often then gen. of person, as e. g. buddhānāṃ, rarely loc., and a clause stating what the 'regular thing' is; but sometimes also referring to what precedes: dharmatā (usually foll. by khalu or hi) ... Mv i.338.19 ( ... (i)yaṃ teṣāṃ sattvānāṃ ... ); iii.255.17 ( ... buddhānāṃ ... ); Divy 3.2; 18.8;' 67.16, etc.; Av i.4.6; 10.6, etc.; Jm 88.3; 98.16; iyam atra dharmatā LV 219.5; RP 10.9; dharmatā hy eṣā dharmāṇāṃ Laṅk 9.4 (vs), for this is the normal condition of states-of-existence; lokahitāna dharmatā SP 392.2 (vs); buddhānāṃ eṣā (read with v.l. eṣa, m.c.) dharmatā Mv iii.327.12 (vs); loc, eṣa buddheṣu dharmatā Ud xxi.12 (same vs with gen. in Pali AN ii.21.22); dharmatā-pratilambha eṣa caramabhā-vikānāṃ bodhisattvānāṃ ... LV 161.12 (here I fail to see that -pratilambha adds anything in particular; the cpd. seems to mean about the same as dharmatā alone, it is the established, normal procedure ... ); (bodhisattva-sya ... ) abhijñādharmatā LV 85.10, normal state of (having the) abhijñā; dharmatā-prāpta Mv i.301.8, arrived at the normal (correct, to-be-expected) state, said of the mind of a Pratyekabuddha; pratyātma-dharmatā-śuddhaṃ (nayaṃ) Laṅk 8.1 (vs); śruṇuya yo ti dharmatāṃ LV 54.2 (vs), who ever hears your true nature (regular procedure; contrasted with one who just sees or listens, i.e. to a few words); lokānuvartanakriyā-dharmatāṃ anuvartya LV 179.18; jarādharmatāyām anatītāḥ Mv ii.151.7, not free from (subjection to) the normal condition of old age; jāti-dharmatāyāḥ (abl.) Av i.211.15, from the normal condition of birth; instr., by the method (means) of ... , by way of ... . (śatana-patana-vikiraṇa-) vidhvaṃsana-dharmatayā Divy 180.24; 281.31; atyantakṣīṇakṣaya-dharmatayā (so, as cpd.) niruddhāḥ LV 419.16 (vs), Tib. śin tu zad ciṅ byaṅ baḥi chos-ñid-kyis (dharmatayā) ni ḥgags; paramagatigato 'si dharmatāye Mv iii.381.8, you have gone to the highest goal according to your natural, normal procedure; dharmatāṃ vā pratisaraty Bbh 255.13, see pratisarati. In Bhad 3 Leumann interprets dharmata-dhātuṃ as m.c. for dhar-matā-dh° which he assumes = dharma-dh°; but dharmata is rather for °taḥ, abl. of dharma, as a separate word. | ||
► p. 278 | ► p. 278 | ||
第486行: | 第793行: | ||
==7、eka== | ==7、eka== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
eka | eka | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 gcig,gcig pu | 〈藏〉 gcig,gcig pu | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[代] 一个,唯一。〔古〕 一,唯一,独。eke…eke 一些…另一些… | [代] 一个,唯一。〔古〕 一,唯一,独。eke…eke 一些…另一些… | ||
【变形】 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
éka, mfn. (√i Uṇ. iii, 43, probably fr. a base e; cf. Zd. ae-va; Gk. $, $; Goth. ai-n-s; also Lat. aequu-s; g. sarvâdi Pāṇ. 1-1, 27; see Gr. 200) , one (eko'pi, or ekaś-cana, with na preceding or following, no one, nobody; the words ekayā na or ekān naare used before decade numerals to lessen them by one e.g. ekān na triṃśat, twenty-nine) RV. &c. ; (with and without eva) alone, solitary, single, happening only once, that one only (frequently ifc.; cf. dharmaîka-rakṣa, &c.) RV. &c. ; the same, one and the same, identical ŚBr. v KātyŚr. Mn. &c. ; one of two or many (eka - eka, eka - dvitīya, the one - the other; esp. pl. eke, some, eke - apare some - others, &c.) ŚBr. KātyŚr. MBh. Hit. &c. ; (eka repeated twice, either as a compound [cf. ekaîka] or uncompounded, may have the sense “one and one,” “one by one” RV. i, 20, 7; 123, 8; v, 52, 17 R. BhP. &c.) ; single of its kind, unique, singular, chief, pre-eminent, excellent Ragh. Kathās. Kum. &c. ; sincere, truthful MW. ; little, small L. ; (sometimes used as an indefinite article) , a, an R. Śak. Vet. &c. (the fem. of eka before a Taddhita suffix and as first member of a compound is eka not ekā Pāṇ. 6-3, 62) ; ► p. 227c | éka, mfn. (√i Uṇ. iii, 43, probably fr. a base e; cf. Zd. ae-va; Gk. $, $; Goth. ai-n-s; also Lat. aequu-s; g. sarvâdi Pāṇ. 1-1, 27; see Gr. 200) , one (eko'pi, or ekaś-cana, with na preceding or following, no one, nobody; the words ekayā na or ekān naare used before decade numerals to lessen them by one e.g. ekān na triṃśat, twenty-nine) RV. &c. ; (with and without eva) alone, solitary, single, happening only once, that one only (frequently ifc.; cf. dharmaîka-rakṣa, &c.) RV. &c. ; the same, one and the same, identical ŚBr. v KātyŚr. Mn. &c. ; one of two or many (eka - eka, eka - dvitīya, the one - the other; esp. pl. eke, some, eke - apare some - others, &c.) ŚBr. KātyŚr. MBh. Hit. &c. ; (eka repeated twice, either as a compound [cf. ekaîka] or uncompounded, may have the sense “one and one,” “one by one” RV. i, 20, 7; 123, 8; v, 52, 17 R. BhP. &c.) ; single of its kind, unique, singular, chief, pre-eminent, excellent Ragh. Kathās. Kum. &c. ; sincere, truthful MW. ; little, small L. ; (sometimes used as an indefinite article) , a, an R. Śak. Vet. &c. (the fem. of eka before a Taddhita suffix and as first member of a compound is eka not ekā Pāṇ. 6-3, 62) ; ► p. 227c | ||
éka, m. N. of a teacher Āp. ; of a son of Raya BhP. ; ► p. 227c | éka, m. N. of a teacher Āp. ; of a son of Raya BhP. ; ► p. 227c | ||
ékā, f. N. of Durgā ; ► p. 227c | ékā, f. N. of Durgā ; ► p. 227c | ||
éka, n. unity, a unit (ifc.) Hcat. ► p. 227c | éka, n. unity, a unit (ifc.) Hcat. ► p. 227c | ||
==8、dvaya== | ==8、dvaya== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
dvaya | dvaya | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 gnyis | 〈藏〉 gnyis | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 两个。 | [形] 两个。 | ||
[中] 两个,二者。 | [中] 两个,二者。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dvayá, mf(ī)n. (fr. and in comp = dvi) twofold, double, of 2 kinds or sorts RV. AV. Br. MBh. &c. (°ye m. pl. Śiś. iii, 57) ; ► p. 503b | dvayá, mf(ī)n. (fr. and in comp = dvi) twofold, double, of 2 kinds or sorts RV. AV. Br. MBh. &c. (°ye m. pl. Śiś. iii, 57) ; ► p. 503b | ||
dvayī, f. couple, pair Naish. Rājat. ; ► p. 503b | dvayī, f. couple, pair Naish. Rājat. ; ► p. 503b | ||
dvaya, n. couple, pair ; two things, both ( e.g. tejo-, the 2 luminaries Śak. iv, 2) Yājñ. MBh. Kāv. &c. (ifc. ā R. i, 29, 14) ; twofold nature, falsehood RV. i, 147, 4 &c. ; the masc. and fem. gender Gr. ; ► p. 503b | dvaya, n. couple, pair ; two things, both ( e.g. tejo-, the 2 luminaries Śak. iv, 2) Yājñ. MBh. Kāv. &c. (ifc. ā R. i, 29, 14) ; twofold nature, falsehood RV. i, 147, 4 &c. ; the masc. and fem. gender Gr. ; ► p. 503b | ||
dvayam, ind. between Śiś. iii, 3. [cf. Zd. dvaya; Gk. $.] ► p. 503b | dvayam, ind. between Śiś. iii, 3. [cf. Zd. dvaya; Gk. $.] ► p. 503b | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
dvaya (nt.), (sexual) coupling, copulation: sa nehaiva mātṛgrāmeṇa sārdhaṃ dvayaṃ samāpadyate Śikṣ 76.8, he does not by any means enter into copulation with a woman; dvaya-dvaya-samāpattiḥ Mvy 9469, copulation, lit. attaining (entering into, sc. a state of) couple by couple. | dvaya (nt.), (sexual) coupling, copulation: sa nehaiva mātṛgrāmeṇa sārdhaṃ dvayaṃ samāpadyate Śikṣ 76.8, he does not by any means enter into copulation with a woman; dvaya-dvaya-samāpattiḥ Mvy 9469, copulation, lit. attaining (entering into, sc. a state of) couple by couple. | ||
► p. 273 | ► p. 273 | ||
第522行: | 第858行: | ||
==9、traya== | ==9、traya== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
traya | traya | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈巴〉 taya | 〈巴〉 taya | ||
〈藏〉 gsum | 〈藏〉 gsum | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[形] 三。 | [形] 三。 | ||
[中] 三种。 | [中] 三种。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
trayá, mf(ī́)n. (fr. trí Pāṇ. 5-2, 43) triple, threefold, consisting of 3, of 3 kinds RV. x, 45, 2 AV. iv, 11, 2 VS. &c. (°yī́ vidyā́), “the triple sacred science,” reciting hymns, performing sacrifices, and chanting [RV., YV., and SV.] ŚBr. AitBr. &c. ; ► p. 457b | trayá, mf(ī́)n. (fr. trí Pāṇ. 5-2, 43) triple, threefold, consisting of 3, of 3 kinds RV. x, 45, 2 AV. iv, 11, 2 VS. &c. (°yī́ vidyā́), “the triple sacred science,” reciting hymns, performing sacrifices, and chanting [RV., YV., and SV.] ŚBr. AitBr. &c. ; ► p. 457b | ||
trayá, n. a triad (chiefly ifc.) ChUp. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 457b | trayá, n. a triad (chiefly ifc.) ChUp. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 457b | ||
trayī́, f. id. see śata- ; ► p. 457b | trayī́, f. id. see śata- ; ► p. 457b | ||
trayá, n. = °yī́ vidyā́ Gaut. Mn. &c. ; the Buddh. triad (Buddha, Dharma, and Saṃgha) Hcar. viii ; summit Bālar. i, 28 ; a woman whose husband and children are living L. ; Venonia anthelminthica L. ; su-mati L. ► p. 457b | trayá, n. = °yī́ vidyā́ Gaut. Mn. &c. ; the Buddh. triad (Buddha, Dharma, and Saṃgha) Hcar. viii ; summit Bālar. i, 28 ; a woman whose husband and children are living L. ; Venonia anthelminthica L. ; su-mati L. ► p. 457b | ||
==10、pratipat== | ==10、pratipat== | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
prati-√pat, P. -patati, to hasten towards, run to meet (acc.) MBh. ► p. 667a | prati-√pat, P. -patati, to hasten towards, run to meet (acc.) MBh. ► p. 667a | ||
== | ==11、sa== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sa | |||
【释义】 [前缀] 有,连同,一起,和,带着,具有。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1137c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) . ► p. 1139a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1140b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, See 5. sa, ► p. 1111b. ► p. 1140c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1141b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1148b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1151a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1151b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 1., (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1181c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) ► p. 1183a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1189c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1190c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1191c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) ► p. 1192a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1195a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 1., the last of the three sibilants (it belongs to the dental class and in sound corresponds to s in sin). ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 2., (in prosody) an anapest ( ˘ ˘ ¯ ) ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 3., (in music) an abbreviated term for ṣaḍ-ja (See ► p. 1109b) . ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 4., m. (only L.) a snake ; air, wind ; a bird ; N. of Vishṇu or Śiva ; ► p. 1111b | |||
sā, f. N. of Lakshmi or Gaurī ; ► p. 1111b | |||
sa, n. knowledge ; meditation ; a carriage road ; a fence. ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 5., mfn. (fr. √ san) procuring, bestowing (only ifc.; cf. palu-ṣá and priya-sá). ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sá 6., the actual base for the nom. case of the 3rd pers. pron. tád q.v. (occurring only in the nom. sg. m.f. [sá or sás, sā], and in the Ved. loc. [sásmin RV. i, 152, 6; i, 174, 4; x, 95, 11]; the final s of the nom. m. is dropped before all consonants [except before p in RV. v, 2, 4, and before t in RV. viii, 33, 16] and appears only at the end of a sentence in the form of Visarga; sa occasionally blends with another vowel [as in saîṣaḥ]; and it is often for emphasis connected with another pron. as with aham, tvam, eṣa, ayam &c. [e.g. so 'ham sa tvam, “I (or thou) that very person;” cf. under tád, p.434] , the verb then following in the 1st and 2nd pers. even if aham or tvam be omitted [e.g. sa tvā pṛcchāmi “I that very person ask you” BṛĀrUp.; sa vai no brūhi “do thou tell us” ŚBr.]; similarly, to denote emphasis, with bhavān [e.g. sa bhavān vijayāya pratiṣṭhatām, “let your Highness set out for victory” Śak.]; it sometimes [and frequently in the Brāhmaṇas] stands as the first word of a sentence preceding a rel. pronoun or adv. such as ya, yad, yadi, yathā, cêd; in this position sa may be used pleonastically or as a kind of ind., even where another gender or number is required [e.g. sa yadi sthāvarā āpo bhananti, “if those waters are stagnant” ŚBr.]; in the Sāṃkhya sa, like eṣa, ka, and ya, is used to denote Purusha, “the Universal Soul”) RV. &c. &c. [cf. Zd. hō, hā; Gk. ὁ, $.] ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 7., ind. (connected with saha, sam, sama, and occasionally in BhP. standing for saha with instr.) an inseparable prefix expressing “junction” , “conjunction” , “possession”(as opp. to a priv.), “similarity,” “equality” ; (and when compounded with nouns to form adjectives and adverbs it may be translated by “with,” “together or along with,” “accompanied by,” “added to,” “having,” “possessing,” “containing,” “having the same” [cf. sa-kopa, sâgni, sa-bhāya, sa-droṇa, sa-dharman, sa-varṇa]; or it may = “ly,” as in sa-kopam, “angrily,” sôpadhi, “fraudulently”) RV. &c. &c. [cf. Gk. $ in $; Lat. sim in simplex; sem in semel, semper Eng. same.] ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1123c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1125a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1130c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa-, inseparable prefix in 'pleonastic' positive use, as opp. of neg. (= Pali id., see Childers); sace(t), saca, sa-cchambita, saśakya, sāntarabahis, santika and sā° (°ke), see s.vv.: (lokapālān yakṣarākṣasa-)-gandharvabhu-jagagaṇa-saparivṛtān LV 209.19 (prose), attended by crowds of...; paribubhukṣitā (so Senart em., mss. paribhuk°) sma sapipāsitā (Senart em. saṃpi°, but no such cpd. is recorded) sma Mv i.8.2 (prose), we are hungry, we are thirsty; ayoguḍā hi agnismiṃ yathā-d-iva (so mss.) sa-tāpitā (so mss.) Mv i.15.15 (vs); this could be interpreted as m.c. for saṃtāpitā(ḥ), which Senart reads (unmetr.) by em.; sa-pṛthagjanasevitaṃ (dharmaṃ) Mv i.33.13 (vs); sajaḍaḥ sajaḍataro bhavati Śikṣ 152.12 (prose), he is stupid, very stupid. Cf. sajyotibhūta, satejobhūta, which do not require similar interpretation. (In sayyathīdaṃ, °thāpi, etc., the pronoun sa, tad, is concerned.) | |||
► p. 538 | |||
==12、apratiṣṭhita (或13)== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
á-pratiṣṭhita, mfn. id. ŚBr. AitBr. TBr. ; unlimited BhP. Jain. ► p. 58a | á-pratiṣṭhita, mfn. id. ŚBr. AitBr. TBr. ; unlimited BhP. Jain. ► p. 58a | ||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
a-pratiṣṭhita, not permanently fixed: °to nirvāṇe, of a Tathāgata, Mvy 406; °ta-nirvāṇa Mvy 1728, nirvāṇa qui n'est pas l'arrêt, Lévi, Sūtrāl. Transl. iii.3 note 4, which see on this term; it is the Mahāyānistic nirvāṇa in which the Tathāgata returns to worldly life to save creatures, tho remaining incapable of personal involvement in it. Gf. apratiṣṭhā-. | a-pratiṣṭhita, not permanently fixed: °to nirvāṇe, of a Tathāgata, Mvy 406; °ta-nirvāṇa Mvy 1728, nirvāṇa qui n'est pas l'arrêt, Lévi, Sūtrāl. Transl. iii.3 note 4, which see on this term; it is the Mahāyānistic nirvāṇa in which the Tathāgata returns to worldly life to save creatures, tho remaining incapable of personal involvement in it. Gf. apratiṣṭhā-. | ||
► p. 48 | ► p. 48 | ||
== | ==13、pratiṣṭhita== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
pratiṣṭhita | pratiṣṭhita | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 brten pa,gnas par gyur pa | 〈藏〉 brten pa,gnas par gyur pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[过分] 确立,建立,完成。〔古〕 安立,依托。 | [过分] 确立,建立,完成。〔古〕 安立,依托。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
práti-ṣṭhita, mfn. (práti.) standing, stationed, placed, situated in or on (loc. or comp.) MBh. R. &c. ; abiding or contained in (loc.) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; fixed, firm, rooted, founded, resting or dependent on (loc. or comp.) AV. &c. &c. ; established, proved Mn. viii, 164 ; ordained for, applicable to (loc.) ib., 226 ; secure, thriving, well off ChUp. Hariv. &c. ; familiar or conversant with (loc.) MBh. ; transferred to (loc.) Hariv. ; undertaken Pañcat. (B. anu-ṣṭhita) ; ascended into, having reached (comp.) Śak. vii, 4/5 (v.l.) ; complete, finished W. ; consecrated ib. ; endowed, portioned ib. ; established in life, married ib. ; prized, valued ib. ; famous, celebrated ib. ; ► p. 671c | práti-ṣṭhita, mfn. (práti.) standing, stationed, placed, situated in or on (loc. or comp.) MBh. R. &c. ; abiding or contained in (loc.) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; fixed, firm, rooted, founded, resting or dependent on (loc. or comp.) AV. &c. &c. ; established, proved Mn. viii, 164 ; ordained for, applicable to (loc.) ib., 226 ; secure, thriving, well off ChUp. Hariv. &c. ; familiar or conversant with (loc.) MBh. ; transferred to (loc.) Hariv. ; undertaken Pañcat. (B. anu-ṣṭhita) ; ascended into, having reached (comp.) Śak. vii, 4/5 (v.l.) ; complete, finished W. ; consecrated ib. ; endowed, portioned ib. ; established in life, married ib. ; prized, valued ib. ; famous, celebrated ib. ; ► p. 671c | ||
práti-ṣṭhita, m. N. of Vishṇu A. ► p. 671c | práti-ṣṭhita, m. N. of Vishṇu A. ► p. 671c | ||
=ātmabhāve pratikṛtau vipāke cāpy asaktatā | apravṛttitadanyārthapravṛttiparivarjane ||6|| = | =ātmabhāve pratikṛtau vipāke cāpy asaktatā | apravṛttitadanyārthapravṛttiparivarjane ||6|| = | ||
【支译】自身及報恩 果報斯不著 護存己不施 防求於異事 6 | 【支译】自身及報恩 果報斯不著 護存己不施 防求於異事 6 | ||
【净译】為離於不起 及離為餘行 6 | 【净译】為離於不起 及離為餘行 6 | ||
==1、ātman== | ==1、ātman== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
ātman | ātman | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈巴〉 attan, atta | 〈巴〉 attan, atta | ||
〈藏〉 bdag,bdag cag,bdag nyid,rang | 〈藏〉 bdag,bdag cag,bdag nyid,rang | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阳] ❶ 呼吸。❷ 自己,自我,身体,自身,可作反身代词使用。❸ 灵魂,本性,本体,心灵,思想。〔哲〕我,自体。〔古〕 我,自,己,己事,己身,身,性,自身。 | [阳] ❶ 呼吸。❷ 自己,自我,身体,自身,可作反身代词使用。❸ 灵魂,本性,本体,心灵,思想。〔哲〕我,自体。〔古〕 我,自,己,己事,己身,身,性,自身。 | ||
单③④⑤: ātmanā,ātmane,ātmanaḥ。 | 单③④⑤: ātmanā,ātmane,ātmanaḥ。 | ||
【例句】 | 【例句】 | ||
《嘉言》Hit: | 《嘉言》Hit: | ||
kathaṃ mārātmake tvayi viśvāsaḥ | kathaṃ mārātmake tvayi viśvāsaḥ | ||
怎么能相信嗜杀成性的你呢? | 怎么能相信嗜杀成性的你呢? | ||
《嘉言》Hit: | 《嘉言》Hit: | ||
ity uktvā tatsamīpa ātmanam ācchādya sthitaḥ saḥ | ity uktvā tatsamīpa ātmanam ācchādya sthitaḥ saḥ | ||
这样说完以后,它就藏身于鹿的旁边。 | 这样说完以后,它就藏身于鹿的旁边。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
ātmán, m. (variously derived fr. an, to breathe; at, to move; vā, to blow; cf. tmán) the breath RV. ; the soul, principle of life and sensation RV. AV. &c. ; the individual soul, self, abstract individual [e.g. ātmán (Ved. loc.) dhatte, or karoti, “he places in himself,” makes his own TS. v ŚBr.; ātmanā akarot, “he did it himself” Kād.; ātmanā vi-√yuj, “to lose one's life” Mn. vii, 46; ātman in the sg. is used as reflexive pronoun for all three persons and all three genders e.g. ātmānaṃ sā hanti, “she strikes herself;” putram ātmanaḥ spṛṣṭvā nipetatuḥ, “they two having touched their son fell down” R. ii, 64, 28; see also below s.v. ātmanā ] ; essence, nature, character, peculiarity (often ifc. e.g. karmâtman, &c.) RV. x, 97, 11, &c. ; the person or whole body considered as one and opposed to the separate members of the body VS. ŚBr. ; the body Ragh. i, 14RāmatUp. ; (ifc.) “the understanding, intellect, mind” see naṣṭâtman, mandâ° ; the highest personal principle of life, Brahma (cf. paramâtman) AV. x, 8, 44 VS. xxxii, 11 ŚBr. xiv, &c. ; effort L. ; (= dhṛti) firmness L. ; the sun L. ; fire L. ; a son L.; [Old Germ. ātum ; Angl.Sax. oedhm; Mod. Germ. Athem, Odem; Gk. ἀϋτμήν, (?).] ► p. 135a | ātmán, m. (variously derived fr. an, to breathe; at, to move; vā, to blow; cf. tmán) the breath RV. ; the soul, principle of life and sensation RV. AV. &c. ; the individual soul, self, abstract individual [e.g. ātmán (Ved. loc.) dhatte, or karoti, “he places in himself,” makes his own TS. v ŚBr.; ātmanā akarot, “he did it himself” Kād.; ātmanā vi-√yuj, “to lose one's life” Mn. vii, 46; ātman in the sg. is used as reflexive pronoun for all three persons and all three genders e.g. ātmānaṃ sā hanti, “she strikes herself;” putram ātmanaḥ spṛṣṭvā nipetatuḥ, “they two having touched their son fell down” R. ii, 64, 28; see also below s.v. ātmanā ] ; essence, nature, character, peculiarity (often ifc. e.g. karmâtman, &c.) RV. x, 97, 11, &c. ; the person or whole body considered as one and opposed to the separate members of the body VS. ŚBr. ; the body Ragh. i, 14RāmatUp. ; (ifc.) “the understanding, intellect, mind” see naṣṭâtman, mandâ° ; the highest personal principle of life, Brahma (cf. paramâtman) AV. x, 8, 44 VS. xxxii, 11 ŚBr. xiv, &c. ; effort L. ; (= dhṛti) firmness L. ; the sun L. ; fire L. ; a son L.; [Old Germ. ātum ; Angl.Sax. oedhm; Mod. Germ. Athem, Odem; Gk. ἀϋτμήν, (?).] ► p. 135a | ||
==2、bhāva== | ==2、bhāva== | ||
梵汉词汇表 | 梵汉词汇表 | ||
【析词】 | 【析词】 | ||
bhāva | bhāva | ||
【对译词】 | 【对译词】 | ||
〈藏〉 dngos po,yod pa | 〈藏〉 dngos po,yod pa | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
[阳] ❶ 存在,事物。❷ 状态,性质,样貌。❸ 性情,情感,情态,表情,行为。 | [阳] ❶ 存在,事物。❷ 状态,性质,样貌。❸ 性情,情感,情态,表情,行为。 | ||
〔古〕 身,事,事物,体,有,有性,性,類,性類。 | 〔古〕 身,事,事物,体,有,有性,性,類,性類。 | ||
【例句】 | 【例句】 | ||
《中论颂》15.3-4:svabhāvaparabhāvābhyām ṛte bhāvaḥ kutaḥ punaḥ | | 《中论颂》15.3-4:svabhāvaparabhāvābhyām ṛte bhāvaḥ kutaḥ punaḥ | | ||
svabhāve parabhāve ca sati bhāvo hi sidhyati || | svabhāve parabhāve ca sati bhāvo hi sidhyati || | ||
‹什› 離自性、他性,何得更有法? | ‹什› 離自性、他性,何得更有法? | ||
若有自、他性,諸法則得成。 | 若有自、他性,諸法則得成。 | ||
‹叶› 若离自性与他性,从何而又有事物? | ‹叶› 若离自性与他性,从何而又有事物? | ||
有自性与他性在,事物才得成立故。 | 有自性与他性在,事物才得成立故。 | ||
第617行: | 第1,183行: | ||
语言、妒意争吵与妩媚, | 语言、妒意争吵与妩媚, | ||
由此等合一体故,女人便是缚缠。 | 由此等合一体故,女人便是缚缠。 | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
bhāva, &c. See p.754&c. ► p. 760b | bhāva, &c. See p.754&c. ► p. 760b | ||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | ||
【释义】 | 【释义】 | ||
bhāvá, m. (√ bhū) becoming, being, existing, occurring, appearance ŚvetUp. KātyŚr. &c. ; turning or transition into (loc. or comp.) MBh. RPrāt. ; continuance (opp. to cessation; ekôti-bhāva, continuity of the thread of existence through successive births Buddh., wrongly translated under ekôti-bh°) MBh. ; state, condition, rank (with sthāvira, old age; anyam bhāvam āpadyate, euphem. = he dies; state of being anything, esp. ifc. e.g. bālabhāva, the state of being a child, childhood = bālatā or -tva; sometimes added pleonastically to an abstract noun e.g. tanutā-bhāva, the state of thinness) Up. ŚrS. MBh.&c. ; true condition or state, truth, reality (ibc. and °vena ind. really, truly) MBh. Hariv. ; manner of being, nature, temperament, character (eko bhāvaḥ or eka-bh°, a simple or artless nature; bhāvo bhāvaṃ nigacchati = birds of a feather flock together) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; manner of acting, conduct, behaviour Kāv. Sāh. ; any state of mind or body, way of thinking or feeling, sentiment, opinion, disposition, intention (yādṛśena bhāvena, with whatever disposition of mind; bhāvam amaṅgalaṃ-√kṛ, with loc., to be ill disposed against; bhāvaṃ dṛḍhaṃ-√kṛ, to make a firm resolution) Mn. MBh.&c. ; (in rhet.) passion, emotion (2 kinds of Bhāvas are enumerated, the sthāyin or primary, and vyabhicārin or subordinate; the former are 8 or 9 according as the Rasas or sentiments are taken to be 8 or 9; the latter 33 or 34) Kāv. Sāh. Pratāp. &c. ; conjecture, supposition Mn. Pañcat. ; purport, meaning, sense (iti bhāvaḥ, “such is the sense” = ity arthaḥ or ity abhiprâyaḥ, constantly used by commentators at the end of their explanations) ; love, affection, attachment (bhāvaṃ-√kṛ, with loc., to feel an affection for) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; the seat of the feelings or affections, heart, soul, mind (parituṣṭena bhāvena, with a pleased mind) ŚvetUp. Mn. MBh. &c. ; that which is or exists, thing or substance, being or living creature (sarva-bhāvāḥ, all earthly objects; bhāvāḥ sthāvara-jaṅgamāḥ, plants and animals) MuṇḍUp. MBh. &c. ; (in dram.) a discreet or learned man (as a term of address = respected sir) Mṛicch. Mālav. Mālatīm. ; (in astron.) the state or condition of a planet L. ; an astrological house or lunar mansion ib. ; N. of the 27th Kalpa (s.v.) ib. ; of the 8th (42nd) year in Jupiter's cycle of 60 years VarBṛS. ; (in gram.) the fundamental notion of the verb, the sense conveyed by the abstract noun (esp. as a term for an impersonal passive or neuter verb having neither agent nor object expressed e.g. pacyate, “there is cooking” or “cooking is going on”) Pāṇ. 3-1, 66; 107 &c. ; N. of the author of the Bhāvaprakāśa (= miśra-bhāva) Cat. ; wanton sport, dalliance L. ; birth L. ; place of birth, the womb L. ; the world, universe L. ; an organ of sense L. ; superhuman power L. ; the Supreme Being L. ; advice, instruction L. ; contemplation, meditation L. (cf. -samanvita). ; ► p. 754b | bhāvá, m. (√ bhū) becoming, being, existing, occurring, appearance ŚvetUp. KātyŚr. &c. ; turning or transition into (loc. or comp.) MBh. RPrāt. ; continuance (opp. to cessation; ekôti-bhāva, continuity of the thread of existence through successive births Buddh., wrongly translated under ekôti-bh°) MBh. ; state, condition, rank (with sthāvira, old age; anyam bhāvam āpadyate, euphem. = he dies; state of being anything, esp. ifc. e.g. bālabhāva, the state of being a child, childhood = bālatā or -tva; sometimes added pleonastically to an abstract noun e.g. tanutā-bhāva, the state of thinness) Up. ŚrS. MBh.&c. ; true condition or state, truth, reality (ibc. and °vena ind. really, truly) MBh. Hariv. ; manner of being, nature, temperament, character (eko bhāvaḥ or eka-bh°, a simple or artless nature; bhāvo bhāvaṃ nigacchati = birds of a feather flock together) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; manner of acting, conduct, behaviour Kāv. Sāh. ; any state of mind or body, way of thinking or feeling, sentiment, opinion, disposition, intention (yādṛśena bhāvena, with whatever disposition of mind; bhāvam amaṅgalaṃ-√kṛ, with loc., to be ill disposed against; bhāvaṃ dṛḍhaṃ-√kṛ, to make a firm resolution) Mn. MBh.&c. ; (in rhet.) passion, emotion (2 kinds of Bhāvas are enumerated, the sthāyin or primary, and vyabhicārin or subordinate; the former are 8 or 9 according as the Rasas or sentiments are taken to be 8 or 9; the latter 33 or 34) Kāv. Sāh. Pratāp. &c. ; conjecture, supposition Mn. Pañcat. ; purport, meaning, sense (iti bhāvaḥ, “such is the sense” = ity arthaḥ or ity abhiprâyaḥ, constantly used by commentators at the end of their explanations) ; love, affection, attachment (bhāvaṃ-√kṛ, with loc., to feel an affection for) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; the seat of the feelings or affections, heart, soul, mind (parituṣṭena bhāvena, with a pleased mind) ŚvetUp. Mn. MBh. &c. ; that which is or exists, thing or substance, being or living creature (sarva-bhāvāḥ, all earthly objects; bhāvāḥ sthāvara-jaṅgamāḥ, plants and animals) MuṇḍUp. MBh. &c. ; (in dram.) a discreet or learned man (as a term of address = respected sir) Mṛicch. Mālav. Mālatīm. ; (in astron.) the state or condition of a planet L. ; an astrological house or lunar mansion ib. ; N. of the 27th Kalpa (s.v.) ib. ; of the 8th (42nd) year in Jupiter's cycle of 60 years VarBṛS. ; (in gram.) the fundamental notion of the verb, the sense conveyed by the abstract noun (esp. as a term for an impersonal passive or neuter verb having neither agent nor object expressed e.g. pacyate, “there is cooking” or “cooking is going on”) Pāṇ. 3-1, 66; 107 &c. ; N. of the author of the Bhāvaprakāśa (= miśra-bhāva) Cat. ; wanton sport, dalliance L. ; birth L. ; place of birth, the womb L. ; the world, universe L. ; an organ of sense L. ; superhuman power L. ; the Supreme Being L. ; advice, instruction L. ; contemplation, meditation L. (cf. -samanvita). ; ► p. 754b | ||
bhāvena, ind., see bhāva , really, truly ► p. 754b | bhāvena, ind., see bhāva , really, truly ► p. 754b | ||
==3、pratikṛta== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pratikṛta | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 bcos pa | |||
【释义】 〔古〕悔除。〈藏〉 lan glon pa 施。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
prati-kṛta, mfn. returned, repaid, requited &c. R. ; ► p. 664c | |||
prati-kṛta, n. recompense, requital MBh. ; resistance, opposition Ragh. ► p. 664c | |||
==4、vipāka== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 vipāka | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 rnam par smin pa | |||
【释义】 [形] 果熟,异熟。 | |||
【例句】 《唯识三十论释》: | |||
tatra kuśalākuśalakarmavāsanāparipākavaśād yathâkṣepaṃ phalābhinirvṛttir vipākaḥ | | |||
de la las dge ba dang mi dge ba’i bag chags yongs su smin pa’i dbang gis ji ltar ’phangs pa’i ’bras bu mngon par ’grub pa ni rnam par smin pa’o || | |||
其中,由于善不善习气成熟的力量,随牵引而有的果之生成,就是异熟。 | |||
〖vipākavāsanā〗 〈藏〉 rnam par smin pa'i bag chags 异熟习气。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ví-pāka, mf(ā)n. ripe, mature RV. ; ► p. 973b | |||
ví-pāka, m. cooking, dressing (= pacana) L. ; ripening, maturing (esp. of the fruit of actions), effect, result, consequence (of actions in the present or former births pursuing those who commit them through subsequent existences) Yājñ. MBh. &c. ; maturing of food (in the stomach), digestion conversion of food into a state for assimilation MBh. Hariv. Suśr. ; bad digestion Car. ; any change of form or state Uttarar. ; calamity, distress, misfortune Yājñ. Uttarar. ; withering, fading Śiś. ; “sweat” or “flavour” (sveda or svāda) L. ; (ibc.) subsequently, afterwards (see comp.) ► p. 973b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vi-pāka, vi-pākin See under vi-√pac, p.973. ► p. 974c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vipāka, m. (Skt. and Pali id.), maturation, coming to fruition (of action): °ka-stha, of Buddhas, = vaipākika, q.v.; °ka-maheśākhya, see this; °ka-phalam Mvy 2276, one of the 5 phala, q.v. (2), expl. by iṣṭahetutvena in Sūtrāl. xvii.31 comm., in Bbh 102.19-20 by akuśalānāṃ dharmāṇām apāyeṣu vipāko vipacyate, kuśala-sāsravāṇāṃ sugatau; -karma-samādāna-hetuso-vipākaso-(for °śo; according to causes and results)-jñāna- LV 433.6; dattvā ca vipākāpratikāṅkṣī LV 181.2, not looking for 'maturation' i. e. recompense, reward (for the gift.) | |||
► p. 492 | |||
==5、asakta== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 asakta | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 zhen pa med pa,chags pa med pa,thogs pa med pa | |||
【释义】 [形] 不执着的。〔古〕 無爱,無礙,不爱,不染,無滞,不留滞,無所滞礙。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
a-sakta, mfn. not stopped or intercepted by or at (loc.; said of arrows and of a sword) MBh. iii, 1602; xiv, 2189 ; (in the same sense a-saṅga Ragh. iii, 63) ; free from ties, independent, Sāṅkhyak. ; detached from worldly feelings or passions, unattached or indifferent to (loc.) Mn. ii, 13 Ragh. &c. ; ► p. 118a | |||
a-saktam, ind. without obstacle or resistance Hariv. 9741 R. iii, 75, 6 ; uninterruptedly Kir. iv, 31 Kām. ; immediately, at once Daś. ► p. 118a | |||
[Add.] eternal, continual, L. ► p. 1318b | |||
==6、apravṛtti== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 apravṛtti | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 'jug par mi 'gyur ba,mi 'jug pa | |||
【释义】 [] 〔古〕止息,滅,不起。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
a-pravṛtti, f. not proceeding ; no further effect or applicability of a precept KātyŚr. ; abstaining from action, inertion, non-excitement ; want of news about (gen.), R. ; (in med.) suppression of the natural evacuations, constipation, ischury, &c. ; ► p. 59a | |||
a-pravṛtti, mfn. inactive, KaushUp. ► p. 1314c | |||
==7、tadanya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 tadanya | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 de ma yin pa,de las gzhan pa | |||
【释义】 〔古〕餘,其餘,所餘,諸餘,外所餘。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tád-anya, mfn. other than that L. ► p. 434a | |||
==8、artha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 artha一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 attha,aṭṭha,aṭṭa | |||
〈藏〉 don, tha tshig | |||
【释义】 [阳] ❶ 意义,意思。〔古〕 義,義趣,義理。 …ity arthaḥ 即……之义。❷ 目的,功用。 | |||
artham/arthe/arthena/arthāya与⑥连用或作复合后词 〈藏〉 phyir 为了求……。〔古〕 求,追求。❸ 利,利益,事情,财富,与法(dharma)、欲(kāma)并称人生三大目的。 〔古〕 義利,利,利益,利益事,饶益,事,事务,事義。 ❹ 〔哲〕 对象,境。❺ 实体。〔古〕義,義性。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
❷《那罗传》: | |||
sa prajārthe paraṃ yatnam akarot susamāhitaḥ | | |||
他一心一意为了求得子嗣,做了很大努力。 | |||
《五卷书》1.388: | |||
tyajed ekaṃ kulasyâthe grāmasyârthe kulaṃ tyajet | | |||
grāmaṃ janapadasyârthe svātmārthe pṛthivīṃ tyajet || | |||
为一族,一人可舍,为一村,一族可舍 | |||
为一国,一村可舍,为求本我,大地可舍。 | |||
《嘉言》Hit 0.12: | |||
ko ’rthaḥ putreṇa jātena yo na vidvān na dhārmikaḥ | | |||
kāṇena cakṣuṣā kiṃ vā cakṣuḥ pīḍaîva kevalam || | |||
若不博学而知法,生此儿子有何益? | |||
要此独眼有何用?若此眼唯是疼痛。 | |||
❹《薄伽梵歌》2.58: | |||
yadā saṃharate câyaṃ kūrmo ’ṅgānîva sarvaśaḥ | | |||
indriyāṇîndriyārthebhyas tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā || | |||
当人从根之对境,如龟收摄肢体般, | |||
彻底收摄回诸根,此人智慧乃坚定。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ártha, m.n. [in RV. i-ix only n. ► p. 90c; in RV. x six times n. and thrice m.; in later Sanskṛit only m.] aim, purpose (very often artham, arthena, arthāya, and arthe ifc. or with gen. “for the sake of, on account of, in behalf of, for”) ; cause, motive, reason Mn. ii, 213, &c. ; advantage, use, utility (generally named with kāma and dharma see tri-varga; used in wishing well to another dat. or gen. Pāṇ. 2-3, 73) ; thing, object (said of the membrum virile ŚBr. xiv) ; object of the senses VarBṛS. ; (hence) the number “five” , Sūryas. ; substance, wealth, property, opulence, money ; (hence in astron.) N. of the second mansion, the mansion of wealth (cf, dhana) VarBṛS. ; personified as the son of Dharma and Buddhi BhP. ; affair, concern (Ved. often acc. ártham with √ i, or gam, to go to one's business, take up one's work RV. &c.) ; (in law) lawsuit, action ; having to do with (instr.), wanting, needing anything (instr.), SBr, &c. ; sense, meaning, notion (cf. artha-śabdauandarthāt s.v. below and vedatattvârtha-vid) ; manner, kind L., prohibition, prevention L. ; price (for argha q.v.) L. ; ► p. 90c | |||
árthāt, abl. ind. see s.v. below ; ► p. 90c | |||
árthe, loc. ind. with √1. kṛ (g. sakṣād-ādi q.v.) ► p. 90c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 artha, nt. (as in RV generally; in later Skt. only m.), aim, goal, etc.: idam eva cārthaṃ (acc.) SP 97.5 (vs); paramārtham etat (acc.) 8,10 (vss); yad arthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā Mv i.4.12, formula re-peated i.34.1 etc.; in these two occurrences all mss. yad, tad. (As one of the four pratisaṃvid, see this.) | |||
► p. 66 | |||
==9、pravṛtti== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pravṛtti | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 'jug pa,'byung ba,zhugs pa | |||
【释义】 [阴] ❶ 前进,活动,运转,行动,行为,作用。❷ 出现,来临,显示,开始。❸ 消息。〔古〕 轉,流轉,轉生,轉作,生,起,生起,行,前進,入,進,增长,成,造,作事,舒用,流布,所作,生死。 | |||
【例句】 《嘉言》Hit: | |||
kiṃ tv asminn ātmasaṃdehe pravṛttir na vidheyā | | |||
然而,不应涉足这件冒生命危险的事情。 | |||
《嘉言》Hit: | |||
sarvatra arthārjane pravrṛttiḥ saṃdeha eva | | |||
在所有获取财富的事情上,行动即是危险。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pra-vṛtti, f. moving onwards, advance, progress GṛŚrS. MBh. Suśr. ; coming forth, appearance, manifestation ŚvetUp. Kālid. Rājat. ; rise, source, origin. MBh. ; activity, exertion, efficacy, function Kap. Sāṃkhyak. MBh. &c. (in the Nyāya one of the 82 Prameyas IW. 63) ; active life (as opp. to ni-vṛtti [q.v.] and to contemplative devotion, and defined as consisting of the wish to act, knowledge of the means, and accomplishment of the object) W. ; giving or devoting one's self to, prosecution of. course or tendency towards, inclination or predilection for (loc. or comp.) Rājat. Hit. Sāh. ; application, use, employment Mn. MBh. MārkP. ; conduct, behaviour, practice Mn. MBh. &c. ; the applicability or validity of a rule KātyŚr. Pāṇ. Sch. ; currency, continuance, prevalence ib. ; fate, lot, destiny R. ; news, tidings, intelligence of (gen. or comp.) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; cognition (with viṣaya-vatī, “a sensuous cognition”) Yogas. ; the exudation from the temples of a rutting elephant L. (cf. Vikr. iv, 47) ; N. of Avanti or Oujein or any holy place L. ; (in arithm.) the multiplier W. (w.r. for pra-kṛti?) ► p. 694a | |||
==10、parivarjana== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 parivarjana | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 yongs su spong ba | |||
【释义】 [中] 离,远离,舍,舍离;除;避;弃损。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pari-varjana, n. the act of avoiding, giving up, escaping, abstaining from (gen. or comp.) Mn. MBh. &c. ; killing, slaughter L. ► p. 601b | |||
=pragraho maṇḍale tredhā nimittāc cittavāraṇam | uttarottarasaṃdehajanmataś ca nivāraṇā ||7||= | |||
【支译】調伏彼事中 遠離取相心 及斷種種疑 亦防生成心 7 | |||
【净译】攝伏在三輪 於相心除遣 後後諸疑惑 隨生皆悉除 7 | |||
==1、pragraha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pragraha | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 rab tu 'dzin pa | |||
【释义】 〔古〕舉。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pra-graha, m. (ifc. f(ā).) holding in front, stretching forth MBh. ; seizing, clutching, taking hold of (°haṃ gataḥ, seized, taken) ib. Hariv. ; a partic. manner of fighting MBh. (= śatror uttānapā-tanârtham pādâkarṣaṇam, or = gala-hastakaḥ Nīlak.) ; the seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse (cf. graha) Sūryas. ; friendly reception, kindness, favour MBh. Hariv. ; obstinacy, stubbornness (°haṃgataḥ, obstinate, stubborn) MBh. ; a rein, bridle KaṭhUp. MBh. &c. ; a ray of light (like all words meaning “rein” or “bridle”) L. ; a rope, halter, cord, string, thong MBh. ; the cord or string suspending a balance L. ; a guide, leader, ruler (also as N. of Vishṇu-Kṛishṇa) MBh. ; a companion, satellite ib. ; binding L. ; taming, breaking (a horse) L. ; the arm L. ; a species of plant Car. (Cassis Fistula L.) ; a vowel not subject to the rules of Saṃdhi TPrāt. ( -tva n. Sch.; cf. 1. pra-gṛhya) ; N. of a partic. sacrificial rite (also -homa KātyŚr. Sch.) ; ► p. 656b | |||
pra-graha, mf(ā)n. receiving, kind, hospitable (with sabhā f. a hall of reception, an audience hall) R. (B.) ; ► p. 656b | |||
pra-graha, mf(ā)n. = ūrdhvabāhu (?) R. Sch. (cf. práñjali-pragr°) ► p. 656b | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 pragraha (m.? = Pali paggaha), exertion, energetic activity: Bbh 205.16 (see pragṛhṇāti; contrasted with śamatha-kāle, prec. line). | |||
► p. 357 | |||
==2、maṇḍala== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 maṇḍala | |||
【释义】 ❶ [形] 圆形的;圆形。[中] 圆,圆圈,圆轮,圆形物,坛城,地域,国土。〔古〕 輪,圆,圆满,圆满輪,圆满處,中围,曼荼羅,曼拏羅,界,地。❷ 集体,集合,聚会〔古〕 会,衆,军,军队。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
máṇḍala, mf(ā)n. circular, round VarBṛS. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, n. (rarely m. g. ardharcâdi, and f.(ī) g. ganrâdi) a disk (esp. of the sun or moon) ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, n. anything round (but in Hcat. also applied to anything triangular; cf. maṇḍalaka) ; a circle (instr. “in a circle;” also “the charmed circle of a conjuror”) , globe, orb, ring, circumference, ball, wheel ŚBr. &c. &c. ; the path or orbit of a heavenly body Sūryas. ; a halo round the sun or moon VarBṛS. ; a ball for playing MBh. ; a circular bandage (in surgery) Suśr. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, n. (also n. pl.) a sort of cutaneous eruption or leprosy with circular spot ib. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, n. a round mole or mark (caused by a finger-nail &c.) on the body Lāṭy. KātyŚr. Sch. ; a circular array of troops MBh. Kām. ; a partic. attitude in shooting L. ; a district, arrondissement, territory, province, country (often at the end of modern names e.g. Coro-mandal coast) Inscr. AV.Pariś. MBh. &c. ; a surrounding district or neighbouring state, the circle of a king's near and distant neighbours (with whom he must maintain political and diplomatic relations; 4 or 6 or 10 or even 12 such neighbouring princes are enumerated) Mn. (esp. vii, 154 &c.) Yājñ. MBh. &c. ; a multitude, group, band, collection, whole body, society, company Yājñ. MBh. Kāv. &c. ; a division or book of the Ṛig-veda (of which there are 10, according to the authorship of the hymns; these are divided into 85 Anuvākas or lessons, and these again into 1017, or with the 11 additional hymns into 1028 Sûktas or hymns; the other more mechanical division, is into Ashṭakas, Adhyāyas and Vargas q.v.) RPrāt. Bṛih. &c. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, m. a dog L. ; a kind of snake L. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍalī, f. Panicum Dactylon L. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, m. Cocculus Cordifolius Bhpr. ; ► p. 775c | |||
máṇḍala, n. Unguis Odoratus L. ; a partic. oblation or sacrifice L. ► p. 775c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 maṇḍala, (1) m. or nt. (= maṇḍalaka 3), spot of ground marked out and ceremonially prepared, in trimaṇ-ḍala (2, q.v.; note also trimaṇḍala 1, in different technical mg.); (2) m. or nt., = maṇḍalaka 4, q.v.: praṇipatya pañcamaṇḍala-namaskāreṇa vandiṣyante Sukh 19.8; see also jānumaṇḍala; (3) m., n. of a yakṣa: Māy 82. | |||
► p. 415-416 | |||
==3、tredhā== | |||
(参看4) | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tredhā́, ind. = trí-dhā RV. VS. &c. ► p. 462a | |||
==4、tra== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tra 2., = tri, “three” See dvi-. ► p. 457a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tra 1., mf(ā)n. (√ trai Pāṇ. 3-2, 3) ifc. “protecting” see aṃsa-, aṅguli-, ātapa-, kaṭi-, giri-, go-, tanu-, tala-, tvak-, vadha- ; kṛta- and jala-trā. ► p. 457a | |||
==5、nimitta== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 nimitta | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 mtshan ma,rgyu,rgyu mtshan,rtags,ltas | |||
【释义】 [中] ❶ 原因,因相。❷ 征兆,预兆。❸ 相,标相,显相,标志。〔古〕 相。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
❷ | |||
《佛所行》(BC 1.49) | |||
atho nimittaiś ca tapobalāc ca taj janma janmāntakarasya buddhvā | | |||
śākyeśvarasyālayam ājagāma saddharmatarṣād Asito maharṣiḥ || | |||
‹昙无谶›:時近處園中,有苦行仙人,名曰阿私陀, | |||
善解於相法,來詣王宫門。 | |||
‹叶›:凭借苦行力及诸瑞相, 名为阿私陀的一位大仙, | |||
得知灭生者的降生, 希求正法,来到释迦王宫前。 | |||
❸ | |||
《五蕴论释》: | |||
viṣaya ālambanam | nimittaṃ viṣayaviśeṣaḥ | nīlapītādyālambanavyavasthākāraṇam | | |||
yul ni dmigs pa'o || mtshan ma ni yul gyi bye brag sngon po dang ser po la sogs pa dmigs pa rnam par gzhag pa'i rgyu'o || de la mtshan mar 'dzin pa ni 'di ni sngon po'o || | |||
所缘即是境,境之差别即是标相,也就是安立青、黄等所缘之因。 | |||
《五蕴论释》: | |||
śabdadvāreṇa yad artharūpam adhyāropitaṃ tan nimittam | | |||
sgra'i sgo nas gang don gyi ngo bor sgro btags pa de ni mtshan ma ste | | |||
标相就是通过声(名字)而被增益出来的义色。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
nimitta, n. (possibly connected with ni-√mā above ) a butt, mark, target MBh. ; sign, omen Mn. Yājñ. MBh. &c. (cf. dur-n°) ; cause, motive, ground, reason Up. Kap. Var. Mn. MBh. Kāv. &c. (in all oblique cases = because of, on account of cf. Pāṇ. 2-3, 23 Pat.; mfn. ifc. caused or occasioned by; °ttaṃ√yā, to be the cause of anything Kād.) ; (in phil.) instrumental or efficient cause (opp. to upâdāna, the operative or material cause) Vedântas. Bhāshāp. ; = āgantu ; deha ; ādeśa ; parvan L. ► p. 551a | |||
==6、citta== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 citta | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 citta | |||
〈藏〉 sems,thugs,dgongs pa | |||
【释义】 [中] 心,思想。〔佛〕《俱舍》七十五法之一;《瑜伽》百法之一,有时特指阿赖耶识。〔古〕 心,意。 | |||
【例句】 《俱舍》: | |||
cittaṃ mano 'tha vijñānam ekārthaṃ || 34ab || cinotīti cittam | manuta iti manaḥ | vijānātīti vijñānam | citaṃ śubhāśubhair dhātubhir iti cittam | tad evāśrayabhūtaṃ manaḥ | āśritabhūtaṃ vijñānam ity apare | | |||
sems dang yid dang rnam shes ni || don gcig || 'byed pas na sems so || shes pas na yid do || rnam par shes pa nas rnam par shes pa'o || kha cig na re dge ba dang mi dge ba'i khams dag gis bsags pas na sems so || de nyid rten du gyur pa ni yid do || rten par gyur pa ni rnam par shes pa'o zhes zer ro || | |||
‹玄› 颂曰:心、意、识体一,心、心所有依,有缘有行相,相应义有五。论曰:集起故名心,思量故名意,了别故名识。复有释言:净不净界种种差别故名为心,即此为他作所依止故名为意,作能依止故名为识。故心、意、识三名所诠。 | |||
‹真› 偈曰:心、意、识一义。释曰:心以增长为义,能解故名意,能别故名识。善恶诸界所增长故名心,或能增长彼故名心,此心为他作依止说名意,若能依止说名识。 | |||
Abhidharmakośavyākhyā : vijñānaṃ prati-vijñaptir ity evam-ādinā sva-lakṣaṇa-skandha-dhātv-āyatana-kuśal'ādi-prabhedena. caittā api sva-lakṣaṇa-paraspara-viśeṣeṇa citta-saṃkhyā'vadhāraṇa-kāma-prathama-dhyān'ādi-bhūmi-prabhedena. ekārtham iti. yac cittaṃ. tad eva manas tad eva vijñānam ity eko 'rtho 'syeti ekārthaṃ. nirvacana-bhedas tūcyate. cinotīti cittam iti. kuśalam akuśalaṃ vā cinotīty arthaḥ. nairuktena vidhinaivaṃ siddhaṃ. manuta iti manaḥ. mana jñāna ity asya auṇādika-pratyayāt tasyaitad rūpaṃ mana iti. vijānāty ālambanam iti vijñānaṃ kartari lyuṭ. citaṃ śubhāśubhair dhātubhir iti cittaṃ. bhāvanā-saṃniveśa-yogena Sautrāntika-matena Yogācāra-matena vā. āśraya-bhūtaṃ manaḥ āśrita-bhūtaṃ vijñānam iti āśraya-bhāvāpekṣaṃ manaḥ. ṣaṇṇām anantarātītaṃ vijñānaṃ yad dhi. tan mana ity artha-parigrahāt. āśrita-bhāvāpekṣaṃ vijñānaṃ. dvayaṃ pratītya vijñānasyotpattir iti vacanāt. | |||
《顺正理论》: | |||
颂曰:心、意、识体一,心、心所有依,有缘有行相,相应义有五。论曰:心、意、识三,体虽是一,而训词等义类有异,谓集起故名心,思量故名意,了别故名识。或种种义故名为心,即此为他作所依止故名为意,作能依止故名为识。或界处蕴施设差别,或复增长相续业生种子差别,如是等类,义门有异,故心、意、识,三名所诠,义异体一。 | |||
《法蕴足论》: | |||
心三摩地胜行成就神足者,云何心?云何三摩地?云何胜?云何胜行,而名心三摩地胜行成就神足耶?此中心者,谓依出家远离所生善法,所起心、意、识,是名心。 | |||
《品类足论》: | |||
心云何?谓心、意、识。此复云何?谓六识身。即眼识、耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识、意识。 | |||
《集论》: tatra cittaṃ katamat | skandhadhātvāyatanavāsanāparibhāvitaṃ sarvabījakam | |||
ālayavijñānam | vipākavijñānam ādānavijñānam api tat,tadvāsanācitatām upādāya || | |||
sems gang zhe na | phung po dang | khams dang | skye mched kyi bag chags kyis yongs su bsgos pa | sa bon thams cad pa'i kun gzhi rnam par shes pa'o || rnam par smin pa'i rnam par shes pa dang | len pa'i rnam par shes pa yang de yin te | de dag gi bag chags bsags pa'i phyir ro || | |||
‹玄› 何等为心?谓蕴界处习气所熏,一切种子阿赖耶识,亦名异熟识。亦名阿陀那识,以能积集诸习气故。 | |||
《五蕴》: | |||
vijñānaṃ katamat | ālambanavijñaptiḥ | cittaṃ mano 'pi tat | citratāṃ manaḥsanniśrayatāṃ copādāya | prādhānyena punaś cittam ālayavijñānam | tathā hi tatcitaṃ sarvasaṃskārabījaiḥ | (...) ālayavijñānatvaṃ punaḥ sarvabījālayatām ātmabhāvālayanimittatāṃ kāyālīnatāṃ copādāya | ādānavijñānam api tat kāyopādānam upādāya | | |||
rnam par shes pa gang zhe na/ dmigs pa rnam par rig pa'o || sems dang yid kyang de yin te | sna tshogs pa dang yid rten byed pa'i phyir ro || dngos su na sems ni3 kun gzhi rnam par shes pa ste | 'di ltar de ni 'du byed thams cad kyi sa bon bsags pa'o || (...) kun gzhi rnam par shes pa de nyid ni sa bon thams cad kyi gzhi nyid dang | lus kyi kun gzhi dang | rgyu nyid dang | lus la gnas pa nyid kyi yang phyir ro || len pa'i rnam par shes pa yang de yin te | lus len pa'i phyir ro || | |||
‹玄› 云何识蕴?谓于所缘境了别为性,亦名心、意。由采集故,意所摄故,最胜心者。谓阿赖耶识,何以故?由此识中诸行种子皆采集故。(…) 阿赖耶识者。谓能摄藏一切种子故。又能摄藏我慢相故。又复缘身为境界故。即此亦名陀那识。能执持身故。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
cittá, See √4. cit. ► p. 398a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
cittá, mfn. “noticed” see a-cítta ; “aimed at,” longed for ChUp. vii, 5, 3 ; “appeared,” visible RV. ix, 65, 12 ; ► p. 395c | |||
cittá, n. attending, observing (tiráś cittā́ni, “so as to remain unnoticed”) , vii, 59, 8 ; thinking, reflecting, imagining, thought RV. VS. ŚBr. &c. ; intention, aim, wish RV. VS. AV. TBr. &c. ; ► p. 395c | |||
cittá, n. (Naigh. iii, 9) the heart, mind TS. i ŚvetUp. vi, 5 MBh. &c. (ifc. f(ā). Pañcat.) ; ► p. 395c | |||
cittá, n. memory W. ; intelligence, reason KapS. i, 59 Yogas. i, 37; ii, 54 Vedântas. ; (in astrol.) the 9th mansion VarYogay. iv, 1 ; cf. iha-, cala-, pū́rva-, prā́yaś-, laghu-, su-, sthira-. ► p. 395c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
citta (= Pali id., also citra, = AMg. citta, = Skt. caitra), n. of the first month of spring (as usually reckoned, but here called 'the first month of summer', evidently implying a division of the year into only three seasons, spring-summer constituting one season of four months; see Senart's note): grīṣmāṇa māse prathame cittasmiṃ (so, or cittesmiṃ, mss.; Senart em. caitrasmiṃ) Mv i.294.3 (vs). | |||
► p. 229 | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
citta, m. (in Skt. only nt.), thought: used with masc. adj. and pron. forms in Bhad 19 abhiyukto . .. cittu ... , ye ... āvaraṇīyās (sc. cittāḥ). | |||
► p. 229 | |||
==7、vāraṇa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 vāraṇa | |||
【释义】 [阳]❶ 〈藏〉 bzlog pa制止,防止,禁止,抵抗,障碍,守护,门。❷ 铠甲。❸ 狂醉,醉象,狂象。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vāraṇá 2., mfn. (fr. varaṇa; for 1. see col.1) consisting of or made from the wood of the Crataeva Roxburghii ŚBr. Kauś. ► p. 944b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vāraṇá 1., mf(ī)n. warding off, restraining, resisting, opposing MBh. Kāv. &c. ; all-resisting, invincible (said of the Soma and of Indra's elephant) RV. ix, 1, 9 Hariv. 1700 ; relating to prevention Suśr. ; shy, wild RV. AV. (with mṛga accord. to some = elephant RV. viii, 33, 8; x, 40, 4) ; dangerous RV. ShaḍvBr. ; forbidden AitBr. ; ► p. 944a | |||
vāraṇá, m. (ifc. f(ā).) an elephant (from its power of resistance) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; ► p. 944a | |||
vāraṇá, m. an elephant-hook Daś. ; armour, mail L. ; a kind of ornament on an arch MBh. iv, 1326 ; ► p. 944a | |||
vāraṇī́, f. a female elephant L. ; ► p. 944a | |||
vāraṇá, m. w.r. for vāruṇī HYog. ; ► p. 944a | |||
vāraṇá, n. the act of restraining or keeping back or warding off from (abl.) ; resistance, opposition, obstacle ; impediment, KātyŚr. MBh. &c. ; a means of restraining Bhartṛ. ; = hari-tāla L. ; N. of a place MBh. ► p. 944a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vāraṇa (m., = Pali id.; ignored by Senart), a kind of bird, which had a pleasant voice (Jāt. vi.539.16) and beautiful eyes (Mv); only in cpd. °ṇa-cakora-nayana: Mv iii.259.6; 267.15; 269.15; applied to Yaśodharā and Rāhula. In some Pali texts identified with the hatthiliṅga (cf. vāraṇa, elephant), which is described as a sort of vulture with a bill like an elephant's trunk (Childers, PTSD); but it seems questionable whether such attractive qualities as the above would be attributed to any vulture-like bird. | |||
► p. 477 | |||
==8、uttarottara== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 uttarottara | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 gong nas gong du,phyi ma phyi ma | |||
【释义】 [形]渐增,渐深,更加。 | |||
[中]❶回应质问,冗谈,废话。❷过分,超额。❸相续,渐次。 | |||
〔古〕后后,展轉,渐。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
uttarôttara, mfn. more and more, higher and higher, further and further ; always increasing, always following Yājñ. Suśr. Pañcat. Kap. &c. ; each following Paribh. 38 ; ► p. 179a | |||
uttarôttaram, ind. higher and higher, more and more, in constant continuation, one on the other MBh. Hit. Suśr. Gaut. &c. ; ► p. 179a | |||
uttarôttara, n. reply to an answer, reply on reply ; a rejoinder ; conversation MBh. Hit. R. &c. ; excess, exceeding quantity or degree ; succession, gradation ; descending ► p. 179a | |||
==9、saṃdeha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 saṃdeha | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 the tshom,the tshom za ba | |||
【释义】 [阳] ❶ 怀疑,疑惑。❷ 危险。〔古〕 疑惑。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《那罗传》4.7: | |||
saṃdehād atha vaidarbhī | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-dehá, m. (ifc. f(ā).) a conglomeration or conglutination (of material elements; see above ) ŚBr. ChUp. ; doubt, uncertainty about (gen. loc., or comp.; na or nâsti saṃdehaḥ or saṃdeho nâsti [used parenthetically], “there is no doubt, without doubt”) Āpast. MBh. &c. ; (in rhet.) a figure of speech expressive of doubt (e.g. “is this a lotus flower or an eye?”) Vām. iv, 3, 11 ; risk, danger Kāv. Pañcat. ► p. 1143c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-deha, See saṃ-√dih. ► p. 1144a | |||
==10、janmatas== | |||
参考11、12 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
janma-tas, ind. according to birth Āp. i, 1, 4 ; according to the age of life Mn. ii, 155; ix, 125 f. MBh. ► p. 411b | |||
==11、janma== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
janma, °nman, &c. See √jan. ► p. 411c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
janma, in comp. for °nman ; ► p. 411b | |||
janma, n. birth L. Sch. ► p. 411b | |||
==12、tas== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 tas | |||
【释义】 单⑤格尾,与āt不同的是它可以表示“作为”。参BHSG § 7.47. | |||
【例句】 SN IV 36.6.3 sukhā bhikkhave vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā | 乐受见为苦。 | |||
《杂阿含》 观于乐受而作苦想。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tas 2., mfn. “throwing” ; see sukha-. ► p. 441b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tas 1., cl.4. °syati, to fade away, perish Dhātup. xxvi, 103 ; (cf. √ taṃs) to cast upwards (or “to throw down”) ib. (Vop.) ; to throw Pāṇ. 3-4, 61 Kāś. ► p. 441b | |||
==13、nivāraṇa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 nivāraṇa | |||
【释义】 [中] 阻止,去除。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ni-vāraṇa, mfn. = prec. mfn. MBh. Hariv. Suśr. ; ► p. 559c | |||
ni-vāraṇa, n. keeping back, preventing, hindering, opposing, refuting ib. Pañc. BhP. ► p. 559c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 nivāraṇa, nt., see s.v. nīvaraṇa. | |||
► p. 306 | |||
=saṃskṛtatvena saṃkalpya saṃpat prāptau nivāryate | trailakṣaṇyānyathābhāvāt tadabhāvāt tathāgataḥ ||8||= | |||
【支译】分別有為體 防彼成就得 三相異體故 離彼是如來 8 | |||
【净译】若將為集造 妙相非勝相 三相遷異故 無此謂如來 8 | |||
==1、saṃskṛtatva== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-skṛtá-tva, n. the being prepared or made ready &c. Jaim. ► p. 1121a | |||
==2、saṃkalpa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 saṃkalpa | |||
【释义】 〈藏〉 kun tu rtog pa,brnag pa,bsam pa [阳] 愿望,意图,构想,想象。〔古〕 分别,思惟。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-kalpa, &c. See saṃ-√kḷp. ► p. 1125c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-kalpá, m. (ifc. f(ā).) conception or idea or notion formed in the mind or heart, (esp.) will, volition, desire, purpose, definite intention or determination or decision or wish for (with loc. dat., or ifc.), sentiment, conviction, persuasion ; (ibc. often = “intentionally,” “purposely,” “on purpose,” “according to will,” &c.; acc. with √ kṛ, “to form a resolution, make up one's mind”) AV. &c. &c. ; idea or expectation of any advantage W. ; a solemn vow or determination to perform any ritual observance, declaration of purpose (e.g. a declaration by a widow of her intention to burn herself with her deceased husband) W. ; the Will personified (as a son of Saṃ-kalpā and Brahmā) Hariv. MārkP. ; ► p. 1126c | |||
saṃ-kalpā, f. N. of a daughter of Daksha (the wife of Dharma and mother of Saṃkalpa) Hariv. ; of Manu's wife Hariv. ► p. 1126c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃkalpa, m., = vikalpa, false discrimination: nimittaṃ nāma saṃkalpaḥ (229.8 nāma-nimitta-saṃ-kalpāḥ) svabhāvadvayalakṣaṇam, samyagjñānaṃ hi tathatā (229.9 °naṃ tathātvaṃ ca) pariniṣpannalakṣaṇam Laṅk 68.3-4 = 229.8-9 (vss); saṃkalpa-kalpa-janitena ayoni-sena (bhavate avidya ...) LV 419.17(-18), vs; there is no noun for the two instr. adj. to agree with, unless we separate saṃkalpa (as instr., § 8.8), by false discrimination produced by vain fancy, and superficial, (ignorance comes to be); or understand manasikāreṇa as suggested by ayonisena? Tib. kun rtog ( = saṃkalpa) rtog pas (by kalpa) bskyed paḥi tshul bzhin ma yin pas, which perhaps supports the second alternative, as it seems to make -janitena modify ayonisena. (In SP 97.13, vs, read anyonyasaṃkalpa-sagauravāś, as one word, having respect for each other's purposes.) | |||
► p. 545 | |||
==3、 | |||
==4、prāpta== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 prāpta | |||
【释义】 〈藏〉 thob pa,rnyed pa [过分] 获得,到达。〔古〕 得,获得,已得,至得,所得,逮得,證得,所證,至,成就,具足。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
prâpta, mfn. attained to, reached, arrived at, met with, found, incurred, got, acquired, gained Mn. MBh. &c. ; one who has attained to or reached &c. (acc. or comp.) AV. &c. &c. ; come to (acc.), arrived, present (prâpteṣu kāleṣu, at certain periods) Mn. MBh. &c. ; accomplished, complete, mature, full-grown (see a-pr°) ; (in med.) indicated, serving the purpose Suśr. ; (in gram.) obtained or following from a rule, valid (iti prâpte, “while this follows from a preceding rule”) Pāṇ. 1-1, 34 Sch. &c. ; fixed, placed L. ; proper, right L. ; ► p. 707c | |||
prâpta, m. pl. N. of a people MārkP. ► p. 707c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
-prāpta, ppp. (= Skt. id., Pali -patta), in āścarya-, adbhuta-pr° generally means filled with astonishment and wonder (e. g. SP 188.5). But in SP 183.4-5 āścaryaprāptā ... adbhutaprāptā ime ṣoḍaśa śrāmaṇerāḥ, rather, some-thing like arrived at a wonderful thing or condition, marvel-ously successful. In KP 9.5 and 10.5 dāntājāneya-prāpta (bodhisattva), and KP 9.14; 10.17, 20 ājanya-prāpta (bodhisattva), clearly arrived at (the condition of being ...) i.e. become (tamed) noble (steeds, see ājanya, ājāneya). In most of these, Tib. renders prāpta by thob pa, which acc. to Jä. primarily means get, attain, but in expressions like saṅs rgyas thob pa become (lit. get) a Buddha. This latter seems clearly parallel to the use of -prāpta in these KP passages. Ordinarily a cpd. ending in -prāpta has as its prior member an abstract noun. Note however that some such prior members may be either abstract or concrete; thus adbhuta may mean either surprising or sur-prise. Possibly the KP usage arose by analogy of such compounds. There are other cpds. of prāpta with a pre-ceding adj.; see s.v. niṣkāṅkṣa. | |||
► p. 392 | |||
==5、nivārya== | |||
参考6 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ni-vārya, mfn. = °vāraṇīya MBh. R. ► p. 559c | |||
==6、vāraṇīya== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vāraṇīya, mfn. to be checked or restrained (see a-v°) ; belonging to an elephant (m. with kara, an elephant's-trunk) Kathās. ► p. 944a | |||
==7、traya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 | |||
traya | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 taya | |||
〈藏〉 gsum | |||
【释义】 | |||
[形] 三。 | |||
[中] 三种。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
trayá, mf(ī́)n. (fr. trí Pāṇ. 5-2, 43) triple, threefold, consisting of 3, of 3 kinds RV. x, 45, 2 AV. iv, 11, 2 VS. &c. (°yī́ vidyā́), “the triple sacred science,” reciting hymns, performing sacrifices, and chanting [RV., YV., and SV.] ŚBr. AitBr. &c. ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayá, n. a triad (chiefly ifc.) ChUp. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayī́, f. id. see śata- ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayá, n. = °yī́ vidyā́ Gaut. Mn. &c. ; the Buddh. triad (Buddha, Dharma, and Saṃgha) Hcar. viii ; summit Bālar. i, 28 ; a woman whose husband and children are living L. ; Venonia anthelminthica L. ; su-mati L. ► p. 457b | |||
==8、lakṣaṇa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 lakṣaṇa | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 lakkhaṇa | |||
〈藏〉 mtshan nyid,mtshan | |||
【释义】 [中] 标志,征兆,特征,相,体相。〔古〕 相,本相,体相,相状。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
安慧《辨中边》: | |||
lakṣyate ’nenêti lakṣaṇam | [...] athavā lakṣyate tad iti lakṣaṇam | 由此(某事物)被表征,此即是相。或者,此能显现,即是相。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
lakṣaṇa, mfn. indicating, expressing indirectly Vedântas. ; ► p. 892a | |||
lakṣaṇa, m. Ardea Sibirica L. ; N. of a man Rājat. (often confounded with, lakṣmaṇa) ; ► p. 892a | |||
lakṣaṇā, f. See s.v. ; ► p. 892a | |||
lakṣaṇa, n. (ifc. f(ā).) a mark, sign, symbol, token, characteristic, attribute, quality (ifc. = “marked or characterized by,” “possessed of”) Mn. MBh. &c. ; ► p. 892a | |||
lakṣaṇa, n. a stroke, line (esp. those drawn on the sacrificial ground) ŚBr. GṛŚrS. ; a lucky mark, favourable sign GṛŚrS. Mn. MBh. &c. ; a symptom or indication of disease Cat. ; a sexual organ MBh. xiii, 2303 ; a spoon (?) Divyâv ; accurate description, definition, illustration Mn. Sarvad. Suśr. ; settled rate, fixed tariff Mn. viii, 406 ; a designation, appellation, name (ifc. = “named,” “called”) Mn. MBh. Kāv. ; a form, species, kind, sort (ifc.= “taking the form of,” “appearing as”) Mn. Śaṃk. BhP. ; the act of aiming at, aim, goal, scope, object (ifc. = “concerning,” “relating to,” “coming within the scope of”) APrāt. Yājñ. MBh. BhP. ; reference, quotation Pāṇ. 1-4, 84 ; effect, operation, influence ib. i, 1, 62 &c. ; cause, occasion, opportunity R. Daś. ; observation, sight, seeing W. ► p. 892a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
lakṣaṇa, nt., mark (Skt.); (1) in Laṅk 37.10 ff.; 38.5 ff., external mark, manifested aspect, of the vijñāna (cf. Suzuki, Studies, 183); contrasted with prabandha, q.v.; fuller expression seems to be svajāti-lakṣaṇa, see Laṅk 38.16 ff., esp. 18 f., svajātilakṣaṇe punar nirudhya-māne (mss.) ālayavijñānanirodhaḥ syāt, suggesting that with its suppression, the ālaya-vijñāna itself is suppressed; for the aṣṭalakṣaṇa vijñāna see vij° 2; (2) in Divy 513.15, 24, sauvarṇena lakṣaṇena laḍḍīś (sc. of a state horse) chorayati, removes the dung with a golden ... (? some sort of implement; acc. to Index, spoon?), perh. shovel or the like; (3) = svabhāva (2), q.v., characteristic, of existing things, there being three such, viz. parikalpita, paratan-tra, pariniṣpanna, qq.v.: Mvy 1662 (to 1665 incl.); Sūtrāl. xi.38-41 (Lévi, indice); svabhāva-lakṣaṇa-traya-kuśalena bhavitavyam Laṅk 67.2; (4) characteristic mark of a superior person (a cakravartin or a Buddha), of which there are standardly 32 (anomalously 28 in Gv 353.7, aṣṭaviṃśatibhir mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇair upeto; no list). There are various lists; in Pali (lakkhaṇa), DN ii.17.10 ff. and iii.143.5 ff. (here followed by lengthy treatments of each item); MN ii.136.6 ff.; in BHS, LV 105.11 ff. (here referred to as LVa) and 429.3 ff. (LVb); Mvy 235 ff.; Dharmas (here abbreviated Dh) 83; Gv 399.20 ff., with valuable brief explanations of each term; Bbh 375.9 ff., with a few brief glosses, but followed on 378.3 ff., 381.8 ff., by more extensive treatments of the various items, with a few minor variants which are mostly not recorded here; finally, Mv i.226.16 ff. = ii.29.19 ff. has, in 7 lines of verse, extremely brief one-word designations for the 32 items, in part so corrupt in the text that I have failed to identify a few items (here, Mv without reference refers to this list); again, Mv ii.304.14 ff. has a very loose, inaccurate, and incomplete list, mingled with some anuvyañjana and other extraneous materials; this is cited below by page and line when it is important. Finally, a few stray lakṣaṇa are unsystematically mentioned in RP 46.13-47.12, and again 50.11-51.5; they will be referred to by page and line under the appropriate items. In modern literature, correlations of various Pali and BHS lists (but without the Gv, Bbh, and Mv lists) have been recorded by Burnouf, Lotus, 558 ff.; Müller, note on Dharmas 83 (but note that in a number of cases Müller here cites Dharmas itself inconsistently with his own text). In Mvy and LVa (as also in the stray fragmentary lists of RP) the order of all other texts is reversed, so as to begin with the head instead of the feet; in citing numbers I have reversed the numbering of these two lists, to facilitate comparison with the other lists; therefore when I cite 'Mvy 32, LVa 32', I refer to Mvy and LVa 1; 'Mvy 31, LVa 31' means Mvy 2, LVa 2, etc. I believe the following list is substantially correct and original, tho the precise language is not always certain; all important variants are cited. The order of the items in BHS varies greatly, no two lists being alike; but the relative order in the Pali lists is, I believe, always or nearly always supported by some BHS evidence, and I see no serious reason to doubt that it represents the original; it is therefore adopted here. 1. supratiṣṭhitapāda (Pali suppatiṭṭhitapāda), Mvy 3; LVb, Gv, Bbh 1; LVa 1 inserts sama before pāda; Mv prob. means this by 1 samā; Mv ii.304.14 samā ... caraṇā supratiṣṭhitā; Dh 2 -pāṇipādatala(tā) for -pāda. — 2. adhastāt pādatalayoś cakre jāte ... (epithets), so Bbh 2, similarly LVa, Gv 2; Pali heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni... (epithets); Mv 2 heṣṭā, also heṣṭā ... Mv ii.304.16; LVb 2 compresses the epithets into a long cpd. ending cakrāṅkitapādatala; Mvy 4 cakrāṅkita-hasta-pāda, and so Dh 1 adding -tala and with pāṇi for hasta, which, tho supported by Tib. phyag, is only a false interpretation of adhastāt or semi-MIndic heṣṭā. — 3. āyatapādapārṣṇi (Pali āyatapaṇhi), so Mvy 2, Bbh 4, Gv 5 (LVa 6 āyata-pārṣṇipāda); or āyatapārṣṇi, LVb 3, Dh 7, with Pali; Mv 4 āyatā. — 4. dīrghāṅguli (Pali dīgha°), LVb 4, LVa 7, Mvy 5, Dh 6, Gv (2d ed.) 6 dirghā asyāṅgulayo, Bbh 3; Mv 3 dīrghā; Mv ii.305.1. — 5. mṛdutaruṇahastapāda (Pali mudutaluṇahatthapāda); LVa 4, LVb 6; Bbh 5 (mss. om. hasta, Tib. phyag, for which ed. pāṇi); Dh 4 and Mvy 7 add -tala; Gv 7 mṛdūni... hastapādatalāni; Mv 11 mṛdu; cf. RP 47.10. — 6. jāla-(jālāvanaddha-?)-hastapāda; Pali jālahatthapāda, to which Bbh 6 jāla-pāṇipāda is closest; LVa 3, LVb 7 jālāṅgulihastapāda; Mvy 6 jālāvanaddha-hastapāda, cf. Mv ii.304.14 (com-bined with No. 1 above) jālāvanaddhā (caraṇā); Dh 3 corrupt, jālābalabaddhāṅgulipāṇipādatala(tā); Gv 4 hasta-pādatale jālinī (2d ed.); Mv 12 jālā. — 7. ucchaṅkha-(?)-pāda (Pali ussaṅkha°), so Gv 3, and so read (ucchaṅkha) Mv 5 and Mv ii.304.19, also with Mironov Mvy 8; Mvy Kyoto ed. utsaṅga°, so LVa 5, Dh 9, and Bbh 7 (-caraṇa for pāda); LVb 8 ucchaṅga°. — 8. aiṇeyajaṅgha (Pali eṇi-j°), so Gv 8, Mvy 1, Dh 11; eṇeya°" LVb 10, Bbh 8 (and RP 51.3); eṇeyamṛgarājajaṅgha LVa 8; Mv 6 eṇi; Mv ii.305.3 eṇī-j°; RP 47.12 eṇajaṅgha. — 9, sthitāna-vanata-pralambabāhu Mvy 15, and sthito'vanata° (as Mvy) LVa 15; cf. Pali ṭhitako va anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati...; Bbh 9 anavana-takāya; LVb 12, Dh 12, Gv 15 pralambabāhu; cf. Gv 13 anūnagātraḥ, (read) anunnatagātro 'pariṇatagātraḥ; Mv(?); Mv ii.305.8 anonatena kāyena pāṇīhi jānukāṃ spṛśe; cf. RP 47.9 dīrgha-parigha-bāhū. — 10. kośopagata-vastigu-hya (Pali kosohitavatthaguyha; it seems that vattha is a mistake for vatthi, cf. Pali vatthi-kosa), so Mvy 10, LVa 10, LVb 11; or kośagata-vas° Bbh 10, Gv 10, Dh 13; Mv 9 kośa; Mv ii.305.10 kośavastiguhya; RP 47.11 guhyakośo. — 11. suvarṇavarṇa (Pali suvaṇṇavaṇṇa, with appended kañcanasannibhataca, cf. Bbh), so Dh 14; LVb 15 suvar-ṇachavi; Gv 29 suvarṇavarṇachavi; Bbh 15 kāñcanasaṃni-bhatvac (cf. Pali); Mv 22 suvarṇa; Mv ii.305.7 kāñcana-chaviśobhanā; in LVa 16 and Mvy 16 combined with next, sūkṣmasuvarṇachavi (Lefm. adds varṇa, by em., after suvarṇa); kanakavarṇa RP 47.10; 51.5.— 12. sūkṣma-chavi (Pali sukhumachavi), so LVb 14 (mṛdutaruṇa-sū°), Gv 28; Dh 15 śuklachavi(-tā); for LVa and Mvy see prec; Bbh 16 ślakṣṇatvāt (but 379.18 sūkṣma-ślakṣṇa-tvacatā, and 381.11 sūkṣmatvaktā) tvaco rajo ... nāvatiṣṭhate, and ślakṣṇa, instead of sūkṣma, is read also in Mv 16; Mv ii.305.14 and RP 51.5 ślakṣṇachavī. — 13. ekaikaroma (or °man; Pali ekekaloma), so LVa 12; Gv 30; Mv ii.305.15; Mv 14 ekā; LVb 16 ekaikanicitaromakūpa; Bbh 14 °romā, adding ... pradakṣiṇāvartaṃ; Mvy 12 °roma-pradakṣiṇā-vartaḥ; Dh 16 pradakṣiṇāvartaikaroma(-tā); cf. RP 47.11; see next. — 14. ūrdhvāgraroma, °man (Pali uddhagga-loma), so Dh 10; Mvy 11 ūrdhvaga-roma; Bbh 13 ūr-dhvaṃga°; Gv 31 ūrdhvāṅga°; Mv 15, mss. intend ūr-dhvāgra or ūrdhaṃga; LVa 11 ūrdhvāgrābhipradakṣiṇā-vartaromā(ḥ); LVb 9 ūrdhvāṅgadakṣiṇāvartaromakūpa; see prec. — 15. bṛhad-ṛju-gātra (Pali brahmujjugatta), so Gv 16, Bbh 21; Mv 7 bṛhat; Mv ii.305.18 prahvarjugātra (corruption for brahmarj°?); Dh 8 ṛjugātra(-tā); LVb 5 bahujanatrātā, obvious corruption; not in LVa, Mvy (replaced, perhaps, by suvartitoru, Lefm. suvivart°, 9 in both?).— 16. saptotsada (Pali sattussada), LVa 18; LVb 17; Mvy 18; Gv 9; Dh 5; Bbh 17 °da-kāya; Mv 20 utsadā; RP 47.9.— 17. siṃhapūrvārdhakāya (Pali sīha-pubbaddhakāya), LVa 14;'LVb 18; Mvy 14; Bbh 18; Gv 11; Dh 18 (°ānta° for °ārdha°); Mv ii.305.6; prob. concealed in Mv 18 or 19, corrupt. — 18. citāntarāṃsa (or °śa, Dh; Pali citantaraṃsa), LVa, Mvy 17; LVb 19; Bbh, Dh 20; Gv 12; prob. citā to be read in Mv 17. —19. nyagrodhaparimaṇḍala (Pali nigrodha°), LVa, LVb, Mvy 13; Dh 22; Bbh 11; Gv 33; Mv 10 nyagrodha.— 20. susaṃvṛttaskandha (Pali sama-vatta-kkhandha), LVa, Mvy, Bbh, Dh 19; LVb 20; Gv 14 (omits su); Mv 24 samā (cf. Pali); Mv ii.305.17 (omits su); RP 47.9 śānta- saṃvṛtta-skandhaḥ; the erroneous spelling °saṃvṛta° in Dh, Mvy text (but Index and Mironov saṃvṛtta), and Gv (but followed in gloss by vṛttāv asya skandhāv ... pīnau, etc.). — 21. rasarasāgra(-vant? Pali rasaggasaggi); °gra- (-tā) Mvy 23; Dh 21; °gra-vant LVa 22; LVb 25; °gra- prāptaḥ Bbh 27; rasaṃ Mv 21; °griṇaḥ Mv ii.306.4; in Gv 17 represented by kambugrīva(-tā) (400.25), on which see BR s.v. kambu; it is paraphrased by adīnakaṇṭhaḥ, with not inferior neck, but for the real meaning see following passage cited s.v. rasaharaṇī, proving connexion with (rasa-)rasāgra, q.v.; cf. also RP 47.9 kambu-rucira- grīvā (among lakṣaṇa). — 22. siṃhahanu (Pali sīha°), LVa 20; LVb 21; Mvy 11; Gv 18; Dh, Bbh 25; Mv 23 sīho (or siṃho); Mv ii.306.4; RP 46.15. — 23. catvāriṃ- śaddanta (Pali cattālīsadanta), Mvy 27; cf. Mv ii.306.5; catvāriṃśatsamadanta LVb, Bbh 22, Gv 19 (1st ed.); samacatvāriṃśaddanta LVa 26; Gv 19 (2d ed.); not identified in Mv; cf. RP 46.17; 50.17. — 24. samadanta (Pali id.), Mvy 26; Dh 27; Gv 21; Mv 26 samā; for Bbh, LVa, LVb, see under prec.; they seem to combine the two (but note that Gv has this item separately, while including sama with the prec); RP 46.17. — 25. aviraladanta (Pali avivara°, but v.l. aviraļa°), LVa, Mvy 25; LVb 24; Bbh 23; Dh 29; Gv 20 aviralāviṣamadanta(-tā); cf. RP 50.17.— 26. suśukla-daṃṣṭra, or °danta (Pali susukkadāṭha): °daṃṣṭra Gv 401.13 (in gloss on No. 24 above); śukra- daṃṣṭrā (v.l. suśukladanta) Mv ii.306.6; °danta LVb 23; Mvy, Bbh 24; śukla-danta LVa 24; śukla-hanu(-tā) Dh 26; śuklā Mv 25; cf. RP 46.17. — 27. prabhūtajihva (Pali pahūtajivha), LVa 21; LVb 29; Dh 24; Gv 22 (su-pra°); prabhūtatanujihva Mvy 21; Bbh 26; Mv ii.306.7; pra- bhūtā Mv 27; jihvā prabhūtā RP 46.18; 50.15. — 28. brah- masvara (Pali brahmassara), LVa, Gv 23; LVb 26; Mvy 20; Bbh 28 (with gloss kalaviṅkamanojñabhāṇī; some Pali texts gloss karavīkabhāṇī); Mv 28 brahmā; Mv ii.306.11; not in text of Dh, but one ms. is cited in Müller's note as reading corruptly prastasvara(-tā), which should doubtless be emended and adopted, deleting Dh 28 haṃ- savikrāntagāmi(tā), which is properly an anuvyañjana; cf. RP 47.1 brahmaghoṣā. — 29. abhinīlanetra (Pali °netta), LVa, LVb 27, Bbh 29, Dh 31; Mv 29 nīla; Mv ii.306.15; Gv 24 (2d ed.); Mvy 28 abhinīlanetra-gopakṣmā, combining this with next. Cf. RP 46.15; 50.13. — 30. go- pakṣma, or °man (Pali gopakkhuma), Bbh 30 °mā (n. sg.), Gv 25 °maḥ; °ma-netra LVa 28, and intended by corrupt readings LVb 28; Dh 32; Mv 30 °ma (mss.); for Mvy see prec.—31. ūrṇā bhruvāntare jātāvadātā mṛdutūlasaṃ- nibhā (? exact language uncertain, but Pali uṇṇā bhamu- kantare jātā odātā mudutūlasannibhā); Pali seems sup- ported by Mv ii.306.17-18, where read bhruvāntare(ṇa) ... ūrṇā hi prakāśāvadātā (mss. cited as °śā ca vātā) mṛduka-(so v.l.)-tūlasādṛśā; LVa 29 ūrṇā ... bhruvor madhye jātā himarajataprakāśā; Dh 17 ūrṇālaṃkṛtamu- khatā; Gv 26 bhruvāntare ... ūrṇā jātābhūn mṛdvī... śuddhā prabhāsvarā himaguḍikā-tuṣāravarṇā ...; Bbh 32 ūrṇā ... bhruvor madhye jātā śvetā śaṅkhasaṃnibhā pra- dakṣiṇāvartā (cf. LV, Mvy); LVa 31 (cf. LVb below, LVa 29 above, Bbh, and Mvy) ... pradakṣināvartakeśaḥ; Mvy 29 ūrṇākośaḥ (so read), and 31 pradakṣiṇāvartakeśaḥ; LVb 31 bhrūmadhye-sujātapradakṣiṇāvartottaptaviśud-dhavarṇābhāsorṇa(ḥ, n. sg., Bhvr.); Mv 31 ūrṇā. Cf. RP 46.14; 50.12. — 32. uṣṇīṣaśīrṣa (see s.v. uṣṇīṣa; Pali uṇhīsasīsa), LVa 32; Mv 32; Mv ii.307.4; Bbh 31 (°ṣāḥ); °śiraska(-tā) Mvy 32; Dh 23; mūrdhni... uṣṇīṣam Gv 27; uṣṇīṣaśīrṣānavalokitamūrdha LVb 30; uṣṇi RP 46.13; 50.11. — A few secondary insertions in individual lists are here ignored. References to the 32 lakṣaṇa, usually as seen on a Buddha, are frequent, e. g. SP 47.10; and see s.v. lakṣa for two cases where Senart assumes, wrongly I think, that Mv substitutes that word for lakṣaṇa. | |||
► p. 458-460 | |||
==9、anyathā== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 anya-thā 二级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 aññathā | |||
〈藏〉 gzhan,gzhan du,gzhan du na,de ma yin pa,de ma yin du zin na,de lta ma yin pa,de ltar ma byas na | |||
【释义】 [不变] ❶ 不同地,以另一种形式,变异地。❷不然,否则。❸错误地,虚妄地。 | |||
〔古〕 餘,所餘,異,差異,相違,由異相,若異於此,若不爾者;虚妄,不實。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《嘉言》Hit 0.8:yan nave bhājane lagnaḥ saṃskāro nānyathā bhavet | | |||
kathācchalena bālānāṃ nītis tad iha kathyate || | |||
因为在生坯器上所敷纹饰不会变异,那么这里对孩子们以故事为伪装讲述政事。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
anyá-thā, &c. See ib. ► p. 46a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
anyá-thā, ind. otherwise, in a different manner (with atas, itas, or tatas = in a manner different from this; anyathā anyathā, in one way, in another way) ; inaccurately, untruly, falsely, erroneously ; from another motive; in the contrary case, otherwise [cf. Lat. aliuta]. ► p. 45c | |||
==10、abhāva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 a-bhāva 二级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 med pa, dngos po med pa,dngos med,mi mnga' ba, dngos po ma mchis pa | |||
【释义】 [形]❶ 无情的。❷不存在的。〔古〕空,無所有。 | |||
[阳] 不存在,无有。〔古〕 無,無有,無性,無有性,無實性,無物,無体,無有實体,非有,無所有,無性。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
a-bhāva, m. non-existence, nullity, absence ; non-entity, negation (the seventh category in Kaṇāda's system) ; proof from non-existence (one of the six pramāṇas in Vedānta phil. [“since there are no mice, therefore there must be cats here”] see pramāṇa) ; annihilation, death. ► p. 61a | |||
==11、tad== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 tad | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 de | |||
【释义】 [代] 那个,这个,他,她,它。 | |||
[不变] 因此,那么。〔古〕 彼。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tád, (nom. and acc. sg. n. of and base in comp. for 2. tá from which latter all the cases of this pron. are formed except nom. sg. m. sás or sá & f. sā́; instr. pl. táis AV. &c.; Ved. tébhis RV. AV. &c.) m. he f. she n. it, that, this (often correlative of yá generally standing in the preceding clause e.g. yasya buddhiḥ sa balavān, “of whom there is intellect he is strong;” sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, connected with the 1st and 2nd personal pronouns, with other demonstratives and with relatives e.g. so 'ham, “I that very person, I myself” [tasya = mama Nal. xv, 10]; tāv imau, “those very two;” tad etad ākhyānam, “that very tale” AitBr. vii, 18; yat tat kāraṇam, “that very reason which” Mn. i, 11; yā sā śrī, “that very fortune which” MBh. vii, 427) RV. &c. ; ► p. 434a | |||
tád, (tad) n. this world (cf. idam) R. vi, 102, 25 ; = Brahma see tat-tva ; ► p. 434a | |||
tád, (tád) ind. there, in that place, thither, to that spot (correlative of yátra or yátas) AV. AitBr. ii, 11 ŚBr. i, x, xiv ChUp. ; ► p. 434a | |||
tád, ind. then, at that time, in that case (correlative of yadā́, yád AV.; of yátra ŚBr. xiv; of yadi Nal. Bhag. &c.; of cêd Śak. &c.) RV. iv, 28, 1 AV. &c. ; thus, in this manner, with regard to that, ix, xiii ŚBr. AitBr. ; (tad etau ślokau bhavataḥ, “with reference to that there are these two verses”) PraśnUp. ; on that account, for that reason, therefore, consequently (sometimes correlative of yatas, yad, yena, “because” Daś. Pañcat. Kathās. &c.) Mn. ix, 41 MBh. &c. ; now (clause-connecting particle) AV. xv ŚBr. AitBr. ; so also, equally, and AV. xi, xv ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tad tad this and that, various, different (e.g. taṃ taṃ deśaṃ jagāma, “he went to this and that place;” tāsu tāsu yoniṣu, “in different or various birth-places” Mn. xii, 74) ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tad tad respective BṛNārP. xiii, 88 ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tenaiva tenaiva pathā, on quite the same path R. iii, 50, 28 ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, yad tad whosoever, whichsoever, any, every (also with vā Mn. xii, 68 [yad vā tad vā, “this or that, any”] Hariv. 5940 Dhūrtas. Śak. Sch.; often both pronouns repeated or the interrogative pron. with cid added after the relative e.g. yad-yat para-vaśaṃ karma tat-tad varjayet, “whatever action depends on another, that he should avoid” Mn. iv, 159; yat kiṃ-cid-tad, “whatever-that” Mn.) ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tan na See s.v. cêd ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tad ind. api “even then,” nevertheless, notwithstanding Śak. (v.l.) Bhartṛ. Prab. Siṃhâs. ; ► p. 434a | |||
tad, tad (ind.) yathā “in such a manner as follows,” namely, viz. Buddh. (cf. Pāli seyyathā; sá yáthā- ŚBr.) Jain. (in Prākṛit taṃ jahā; cf. sejjahā) Pat. Śak. ; [cf. ὁ, ἡ, τό; Goth. sa, so, that-a ; Lat. (is-)te, (is-)ta, (is-)tud, tam, tum, tunc.] ► p. 434a | |||
==12、tathāgata== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 tathāgata | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 de bzhin gshegs pa | |||
【释义】 [阳] 如来。〔古〕 佛,如來。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
táthā-gata, mfn. being in such a state or condition, of such a quality or nature RPrāt. iii, 5 MBh. Mālav. v, 9/10 ; “he who comes and goes in the same way [as the Buddhas who preceded him],” Gautama Buddha Buddh. Sarvad. ; a Buddhist SŚaṃkar. i, 70; x ► p. 433c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
tathāgata (= Pali id.) = Buddha: Mvy 3 (= Tib. de bzhin gśegs pa, thus gone or come (could = gata or āgata; both theories are held; acc. to Jä. and Das, in Tibet today the commonly accepted interpretation is who goes, or has gone, in the same way, sc. as earlier Buddhas); seven listed Dharmas 6 (Vipaśyin, Śikhin, Viśvabhū, Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, Kāśyapa, Śākyamuni); Vipaśyin is the first 'of 7 Tathāgatas, of whom I (Śākya-muni) am the 7th' SP 201.4; same list, with variant forms, Mmk 397.11; Divy 333.3; and with other Buddhas, LV 5.15; 20 listed Mvy 82-101, the above seven, with variants, in 87-94; passim in all texts; as adj., f. °gatī, only m.c. for tāthāgatī, of (a) Buddha(s), in list of bhūmi: dharma-meghā tathāgatī Laṅk 318.12 (vs; tāth° metr. impossible; sc. bhūmiḥ; see s.v. tāthāgata). | |||
► p. 248 | |||
=sahetuphalagāmbhīryadeśanāsmin yugādhame |na niṣphalā yataḥ santi bodhisattvās trayānvitāḥ ||9||= | |||
【支译】說因果深義 於彼惡世時 不空以有實 菩薩三德備 9 | |||
【净译】因與果甚深 於彼惡時說 此非無利益 由三菩薩殊 9 | |||
==1、hetu== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 hetu | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 rgyu,phyir,gtan tshigs | |||
【释义】 [阳] 原因。〔古〕 因,由,因相,因缘,爲,爲...故,因缘。〔哲〕 因,因明五支或三支之一。 | |||
【例句】 《正理经》NS 1.1.34: udāharaṇasādharmyāt sādhyasādhanaṃ hetuḥ | 1.1.35 tathā vaidharmyāt | | |||
由于喻例的相似特性,而有的对于所立(论题)的论证手段,同样也由于(喻例的)相异特性。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
hetú, &c. See ► p. 1303c. ► p. 1297c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
hetú, m. “impulse,” motive, cause, cause of, reason for (loc., rarely dat. or gen.; hetunā,hetoḥ,hetave,hetau, “for a cause or reason,” “by reason of,” “on account of” [with gen. or comp. e.g. mama hetoḥ or mad-dhetoḥ, “on account of me”]; kaṃ hetum or ko hetuḥ, “wherefore?” “why?” Pāṇ. 2-2, 23 Pat.; yato hetoḥ, “because;” anena hetunā or iti hetoḥ, “for this reason;” mṛtyu-hetave, “in order to kill;” hetur alaukikaḥ, “a supernatural cause;” ifc. hetu also = “having as a cause or motive,” “caused or effected or actuated or attracted or impelled by” e.g. karma-hetu, “caused by the acts [of a former existence]” Mn. i, 49; māṃsa-hetu, “attracted by [the smell of] flesh” MBh. x, 496; karma-phala-hetu, “impelled by [the expectation of] the consequences of any act” BhP. ii, 47; 49) RV. &c. &c. ; a logical reason or deduction or argument, the reason for an inference (esp. applied to the second member or Avayava of the five-membered syllogism see nyāya) Nyāyad. IW. 61 ; logic (in general see hetuvidyā) ; (in gram.) the agent of the causal verb Pāṇ. 1-4, 55 &c. ; (with Buddhists) primary cause (as opp. to pratyaya q.v.) Sarvad. ; (with Paśu-patis) that which causes the bondage of the soul i.e. the external world and the senses ib. ; a means (hetubhiḥ ifc. “by means of”) MBh. ; mode, manner (hetubhiḥ ifc. “according to”) ib. Suśr. Yājñ. ; price, cost Rājat. v, 71 ; condition MBh. ; (in rhet.) = kāvya-liṅga (q.v.) Bhar. Kpr. Sāh. ► p. 1303c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
hetu, (1) (substantially = Skt. id.) cause; on relation to pratyaya (1) see this; normally m. as in Skt. and Pali (Childers), but mss. make it f. in Mv i.43.10 (vs), intending sarvābhi (°hi) hetūbhi upasthitāhi, where Senart em. sarvehi... upasthitehi, in accord with repetition i.242.20 (where read upasthitehi instead of Senart's violent em.); six hetu, Mvy 2259-65 and AbhidhK. LaV-P. ii.245 (in different order), kāraṇa-h° (raison d'être, LaV-P.), saha-bhū- (cause mutuelle), vipāka- (cause de rétribution), saṃ-prayukta- (cause associée), sarvatraga- (cause universelle), sabhāga- (cause pareille); La V-P.'s note here, and the foll. pages of his transl., explain the terms at length; (2) hetu as adv. (= Pali id.; only noted ifc. in BHS but in Pali used alone with prec. gen.; acc. to Senart i note 536, an 'atté-nuation' of Skt. hetoḥ), for the sake of, because of, in order to: bodhihetur (for the sake of enlightenment, Tib. byaṅ chub don du; is -r 'Hiatus-bridger', § 4.62? or may -hetur be m.c. for -hetor, supporting Senart's theory? a nom. sg. is impossible here) aprameya tyaktu dustyajā tvayā LV 170.14 (vs); ārakṣahetu, for the purpose of guarding, for a guard, Mv i.204.6, 11 = ii.8.1, 6 (vss); parasya vismā-panahetu (so Tib., ṅo mtshar...; text viśvāp°) KP 126.14 (vs), to astonish another; (3) a high number: hetuḥ Mvy 8018. | |||
► p. 621 | |||
==2、phala== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 phala 一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 shing thog,'bras bu | |||
【释义】 [中] 果,果实,果报。〔古〕 果,果實,结果,成果,后果,惩罚,目的。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
phála, n. (ifc. f(ā or ī). ) fruit (esp. of trees) RV. &c. &c. ; the kernel or seed of a fruit, Āmar. ; a nutmeg Suśr. ; the 3 myrobalans (= tri-phalā q.v.) L. ; the menstrual discharge L. (cf. puṣpa) ; fruit (met.), consequence, effect, result, retribution (good or bad), gain or loss, reward or punishment, advantage or disadvantage KātyŚr. MBh. Kāv. &c. ; benefit, enjoyment Pañcat. ii, 70 ; compensation Yājñ. ii, 161 ; (in rhet.) the issue or end of an action Daś. Sāh. ; (in math.) the result of a calculation, product or quotient &c. Sūryas. ; corrective equation ib. Gol. ; area or superficial contents of a figure Āryabh. ; interest on capital ib. ; the third term in a rule of three sum ib. Sch. ; a gift, donation L. ; a gaming board MBh. [cf. Goth. spilda ; Icel. spjald] ; a blade (of a sword or knife) MBh. R. Kum. ; the point of an arrow Kauś. ; a shield L. ; a ploughshare (= phāla) L. ; a point or spot on a die MBh. iv, 24 ; ► p. 716c | |||
phála, m. Wrightia Antidysenterica L. ; ► p. 716c | |||
phálā, f. a species of plant Car. ; ► p. 716c | |||
phála, f. w.r. for tula Hcat. ; ► p. 716c | |||
phálī, f. Aglaia Odorata L. ; a kind of fish (= phali) L. ► p. 716c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
phala, nt. (1) (= Skt. and Pali phalaka) bark, bast (used for garments): phala-muñjāsana-valkala ... LV249.1 (prose); (2) (= Skt. and Pali id.) religious fruition or attainment, passim; prathama phala Mv i.174.12, 14; 192.7, 8, = the first stage of religious advancement, cf. śrotāpattiphale i.175.1; five phalāni, sc. of karuṇā, com-passion, acc. to Sūtrāl. xvii.31 with comm., which explains all five, in different order: Mvy 2271-7, niṣyanda-, adhi-pati-, puruṣakāra-, vipāka-, visaṃyoga-phalam (see the various prior members). However, nothing is said of karuṇā in Mvy, and it probably intends them as different kinds of results of anything; so Bbh 102.16 ff. and AbhidhK. LaV-P. ii.287 ff., iv.185 ff. treat the same terms. | |||
► p. 395-396 | |||
==3、gāmbhīrya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 gāmbhīrya | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 drod zin pa | |||
【释义】 [中] 深沉,深奥,威严。〔古〕 自珍奇。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
gāmbhīrya, mfn. being in the depths Pāṇ. 4-3, 58 ; ► p. 354a | |||
gāmbhīrya, n. deepness, depth (of water, sound, &c.) MBh. xiii, 4637 R. ; (of the voice of a Jaina saint) , V. ; depth or profundity of character, earnestness R. &c. ; depth of meaning, deep recondite sense W. ; dignity. Kathās. lxxxvi, 32 ; generosity, cxxiv, 83 ; calmness, composure Daśar. ii, 12 Sāh. iii, 50 and 53 ; (in rhet.) a hidden allusion, Pratāpar. ► p. 354a | |||
==4、deśanā== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 deśanā | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 bstan pa,ston pa,bshad | |||
【释义】 [阴]❶ 〔古〕 説,所説,宣説,説法,演説,宣扬,教,言教。❷ 〈藏〉 bshags par bya ba告白。〔古〕發露。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
deśanā, f. direction, instruction SaddhP. Śatr. ► p. 496c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
deśanā (= Pali des°; to Skt. or BHS deśayati plus -anā), (1) preaching, in this sense Skt., hardly specifically Buddh., but see °nā-pāṭha, dharma-d°, (°nā-)matsarin; also, deśanā dhaṛmasya Mv i.42.10; 53.5; °nā naranāgānāṃ (= Buddhānāṃ) Mv i.168.4; deśanā-naya, the way of verbal instruction, in Laṅk 148.10 ff., 172.6, distinct from and inferior to siddhānta-(pratyavasthāna-)naya, the finally approved way, which is that of immediate personal realization, see Suzuki, Studies, 409 (where other citations of this depreciative use' of deśanā in Laṅk); LaVallée Poussin, HJAS 3.137 ff.; (2) confession (so Pali, e.g. Jāt. v.379.22 desanaṃ paṭigaṇhanto; not in PTSD, Childers): °nā-parivarta Suv 20.1, Confession, title of Chap. 3; °nā-gāthāḥ 21.8; pāpa-d° Dharmas 14; °nādyaṃ tu pāpāder Sādh 72.13, et alibi; see also atyaya-d°; (3) see s.v. gaṇḍī(-deśanā). | |||
► p. 271 | |||
==5、yuga== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 yuga | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 dus | |||
【释义】 [中] 轭,一对,时代。〔古〕 世。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yuga, yugma,yugya &c. See p.854. ► p. 853a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yugá, n. a yoke, team (exceptionally m.) RV. &c. &c. ; (ifc. f(ā).) a pair, couple, brace GṛŚrS. MBh. &c. ; (also with mānuṣa or manuṣya) a race of men, generation (exceptionally m.) RV. &c. &c. ; a period or astronomical cycle of 5 (rarely 6) years, a lustrum (esp. in the cycle of Jupiter) MBh. Var. Suśr. ; an age of the world, long mundane period of years (of which there are four, viz. 1. Kṛita or Satya, 2. Tretā, 3. Dvāpara, 4. Kali, of which the first three have already elapsed, while the Kali, which began at midnight between the 17th and 18th of Feb. 3102 B.C. [O. S.] , is that in which we live; the duration of each is said to be respectively 1,728,000, 1,296,000, 864,000, and 432,000 years of men, the descending numbers representing a similar physical and moral deterioration of men in each age; the four Yugas comprise an aggregate of 4,320,000 years and constitute a “great Yuga” or Mahā-yuga; cf. IW. 178) AV. &c. &c. ; a measure of length = 86 Aṅgulas Śulbas. (= 4 Hastas or cubits L.) ; a symbolical N. for the number “four” Sūryas. ; for the number “twelve” Jyot. ; N. of a partic. position or configuration of the moon VarBṛS. ; of a partic. Nābhasa constellation (of the class called Sāṃkhya-yoga, when all the planets are situated in two houses) ib. ; of a double Śloka or two Ślokas so connected that the sense is only completed by the two together Rājat. ► p. 854a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yuga, nt. (Pali id., I believe, in Sn 834 dhonena yugaṃ samāgamā, you have come under subjugation by the Pure, i.e. by Buddha; otherwise PTSD, Chalmers), yoke, in fig. sense of subjugation: yuga-m-antarasmi (for yugāntare) sthita māru LV 338.11 (vs), Māra, abiding under (lit. in the middle of) the yoke (being subjugated). | |||
► p. 447 | |||
==6、adhama== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 a-dhama | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 adhama | |||
〈藏〉 dma' ba,tha shal | |||
【释义】 [形]最低的,最低贱的,最差的。〔古〕賤。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
adhamá, mfn. (see ádhara), lowest, vilest, worst, very low or vile or bad (often ifc., as in narâdhama, the vilest or worst of men) ; ► p. 19c | |||
adhamá, m. an unblushing paramour ; ► p. 19c | |||
adhamā, f. a low or bad mistress [cf. Lat. infimus]. ► p. 19c | |||
==7、niṣphala== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 niṣphala | |||
【释义】 [形] 无效果的,无用的。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
niṣ-phala, mf(ā)n. bearing no fruit, fruitless, barren, resultless, successless, useless, vain Mn. MBh. Var. Kāv. &c. ; seedless, impotent W. ; ► p. 543b | |||
niṣ-phalā, f. a woman past childbearing or menstruation (also ī, v.l. niṣ-kalā) L. ; a species of Momordica L. ► p. 543b | |||
==8、yata== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 yata | |||
【释义】 [过分] 克制,控制。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yata, See under √yam, p.845. ► p. 841b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yatá, mfn. restrained, held in, held forth, kept down or limited, subdued, governed, controlled &c. RV. &c. &c. (cf. comp. below) ; ► p. 845b | |||
yatá, n. restraint (?) see yataṃ-kará ; the spurring or guiding of an elephant by means of the rider's feet L. ► p. 845b | |||
==9、santi== | |||
参考10 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
santi, See sati, ► p. 1138b. ► p. 1141a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
santi, f. = sati, or sāti L. ► p. 1142b | |||
==10、sati== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sati | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 gyur na yang,yod la,yod du zin kyang | |||
【释义】 〔古〕若,虽有,現有。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sati, f. = sāti, santi Pāṇ. Vop. ; = dāna, avasāna L. ► p. 1138b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sati, See ► p. 1138b. ► p. 1140c | |||
==11、bodhisattva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 bodhi-sattva 一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 byang chub sems dpa' | |||
【释义】 [阳] 菩萨。〔古〕 菩薩,菩提薩埵。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
【百科与参考】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
bodhi-sattva, m. “one whose essence is perfect knowledge,” one who is on the way to the attainment of knowledge (i.e. a Buddhist saint when he has only one birth to undergo before obtaining the state of a supreme Buddha and then Nirvāṇa) Śiś. Kathās. Rājat. Buddh. (the early doctrine had only one Bodhi-sattva, viz. Maitreya; the later reckoned many more MWB. 134, 188, 189) ; N. of the principal Buddha of the present era (before he became a Buddha) Śiś. Sch. L. ; of a poet Cat. ► p. 734c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
bodhisattva (= Pali °satta), person destined for enlightenment, Buddha-to-be, passim; Mvy 625, followed by list of standard epithets of such persons incl. jinaputra; other epithets meaning son of Buddha are frequent; there are many lists of names, such as the 92 beginning Mvy 645; each name in such lists as occur in works here included is, generally speaking, recorded in this Dict., but e. g. the list Mmk 8.21 ff. is omitted because it is very corrupt and obscure, even the word-division being often doubtful; eight special B's listed Dharmas 12, Maitreya, Gagana-gañja, Samantabhadra, Vajrapāṇi, Mañjuśrī, Sarva-nivaraṇaviṣkambhin, Kṣitigarbha, Khagarbha, qq.v.; in SP 64.12-13 (sa tvaṃ) Śāriputra bodhisattva-saṃman-tritena °ttva-rahasyeneha mama pravacana upapannaḥ, sa tvaṃ ... bodhisattvādhiṣṭhānena ..., refers to Śāriputra's own saṃmantrita (q.v.) etc. as a Bodhisattva, not (with Burnouf and Kern) to the Buddha's (they use the word Bodhisattva in translating, but understand it as referring to the Buddha, which is contrary to usage). | |||
► p. 403 | |||
==12、traya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 traya | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 taya | |||
〈藏〉 gsum | |||
【释义】 [形] 三。 | |||
[中] 三种。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
trayá, mf(ī́)n. (fr. trí Pāṇ. 5-2, 43) triple, threefold, consisting of 3, of 3 kinds RV. x, 45, 2 AV. iv, 11, 2 VS. &c. (°yī́ vidyā́), “the triple sacred science,” reciting hymns, performing sacrifices, and chanting [RV., YV., and SV.] ŚBr. AitBr. &c. ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayá, n. a triad (chiefly ifc.) ChUp. KaṭhUp. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayī́, f. id. see śata- ; ► p. 457b | |||
trayá, n. = °yī́ vidyā́ Gaut. Mn. &c. ; the Buddh. triad (Buddha, Dharma, and Saṃgha) Hcar. viii ; summit Bālar. i, 28 ; a woman whose husband and children are living L. ; Venonia anthelminthica L. ; su-mati L. ► p. 457b | |||
==13、anvita== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 anv-ita | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 ldan pa | |||
【释义】 [过分] ❶ 被(③)所跟随,被充满,具有。❷ 相联系,合适的。❸ 被理解的。❹ 随行的。〔古〕 具,具足。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《那罗传》3.16: | |||
praśaśaṃsuś ca suprītā nalaṃ tā vismayānvitāḥ | | |||
na caivam abhyabhāṣanta manobhis tv abhyapūjayan || | |||
充满惊异的她们赞美那罗,虽不说话心已拜倒。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
anv-ita, mfn. gone along with ; joined, attended, accompanied by, connected with, linked to ; having as an essential or inherent part, endowed with, possessed of, possessing ; acquired ; reached by the mind, understood ; following ; connected as in grammar or construction. ► p. 47b | |||
=śikṣayopāsānāt pūrvaṃ kuśalasyāvaropaṇāt |śīlavanto 'nyabuddheṣu guṇavantaś ca kīrtitāḥ ||10||= | |||
【支译】修戒於過去 及種諸善根 戒具於諸佛 亦說功德滿 10 | |||
【净译】由於先佛所 奉持於戒學 并植善根故 名具戒具德 10 | |||
==1、śikṣa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 śikṣa | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 slob pa | |||
【释义】 〔古〕修學。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
śikṣa, m. N. of a king of the Gandharvas R. ; ► p. 1070a | |||
śikṣā, f. See below. ► p. 1070a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 śikṣa, nt., for śikṣā, q.v. | |||
► p. 527 | |||
==2、yopana== | |||
??? | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yopana, n. effacing, removing, confusing, destroying &c. (only ifc.; cf. jana-, jīvita-, pada-, śapatha-y°). ► p. 855b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
yopana, yoyupana See ► p. 855b. ► p. 858c | |||
==3、pūrva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pūrva | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 dang por,gong ma, gong da, snga nas,sngar,sngon,sngar byung nas,shar | |||
【释义】 [形] ❶ 前面的,先前的。❷ 东方的。❸ 年老的。 | |||
[阳] 祖先,前人,古人。 | |||
[中]前者,前一部分。 | |||
〔古〕 前,先,先來,爲先,昔,昔來,先世,先已,东。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pū́rva, mf(ā)n. (connected with purā, puras, pra, and declined like a pron. when implying relative position whether in place or time, but not necessarily in abl. loc. sg. m. n. and nom. pl. m.; see Pāṇ. 1-1, 27; 34; vii, 1, 16) being before or in front, fore, first RV. &c. &c. ; eastern, to the east of (abl.) ib. ; former, prior, preceding, previous to, earlier than (abl. or comp.) ib. (gaja-pūrva, preceding the number “eight” i.e. seven, the seventh Śrutab.; māsena p°ormāsa-p°, earlier by a month Pāṇ. 2-1, 31; ifc. often = formerly or before e.g. strī-p°, formerly a wife; āḍhya-p°, formerly wealthy; esp. after a pp. e.g. kṛta-p°, done before, dṛṣṭa-p°, seen before; ifc. also preceded or accompanied by, attended with e.g. smita-pūrvā-vāk, speech accompanied by smiles; sometimes not translatable e.g. mṛdu-pūrvā vāk, kind speech) ; ancient, old, customary, traditional RV. &c. &c. ; first (in a series), initial, lowest (opp. to uttara; with dama or sāhasa “the lowest fine”) Mn. viii, 120 &c. ; (with vayas) “first age,” youth MBh. ; foregoing, aforesaid, mentioned before (abl.) Mn. MBh. Pāṇ. ► p. 643a | |||
pū́rva, m. an ancestor, forefather (pl. the ancients, ancestors) RV. &c. &c. ; an elder brother R. ; N. of a prince BhP. ; ► p. 643a | |||
pū́rvā, f. (with or sc. diś) the east MBh. R. ; N. of a country to the east of Madhya-deśa L. ; of the Nakshatras Pūrva-phalgunī, Pūrvâshāḍhā and Pūrvabhadrapadā collectively Var. ; ► p. 643a | |||
pū́rva, n. the fore part Śak. ii, 4 (cf. Pāṇ. 2-2, 1) ; a partic. high number (applied to a period of years) Buddh. ; N. of the most ancient of Jaina writings (of which 14 are enumerated) L. ; N. of a Tantra Cat. ; an ancient tradition W. ; ► p. 643a | |||
pū́rvam, ind. before (also as a prep. with abl.), formerly, hitherto, previously (sometimes with pres.) RV. &c. &c. (often ibc. e.g. pūrva-kārin, active before, pūrvôkta, said before; also ifc. in the sense of “with” e.g. prīti-pūrvam, with love; mati-pūrvam with intention, intentionally; mṛdu-pūrva-√bhāṣ, to speak kindly; cf. above; also with an ind.p. e.g. pūrva-bhojam, or -bhuktvā, having eaten before Pāṇ. 3-4, 24; adya-p°, until now, hitherto; previously -tataḥ, first-then; pūrva-paścāt, previously-afterwards; pūrva-upari, previously-subsequently; pūrva-adhūnā or adya, formerly-now) ; ► p. 643a | |||
pū́rveṇa, ind. in front, before ; eastward, to the east of (opp. to apareṇa, with gen. or acc.; cf. Pāṇ. 5-3, 35 Sch.) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; (with tataḥ) “to the east of that” MBh. ► p. 643a | |||
==4、kuśala== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 kuśala | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 kusala | |||
〈藏〉 dge ba,mkhas pa | |||
【释义】 [形] ❶ 善的,吉祥的。❷ 善于,适于,精通,熟练,能够(接⑥⑦)。 | |||
[中] ❶ 善,安康,幸福,美德。❷善巧,机敏。 | |||
〔古〕善,善巧,善法,妙善。 | |||
【例句】 [中] ❶ 《那罗传》: | |||
tāv arcitvā maghavā tataḥ kuśalam avyayam | | |||
papracchânāmayaṃ cāpi tayoḥ sarvagataṃ vibhuḥ || | |||
因陀罗礼敬二人之后,便问二人,一切安康、无衰与无恙。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
kúśala, mf(ā)n. (gaṇas sidhmâdi, śreṇy-ādi, and śramaṇâdi) right, proper, suitable, good (e.g. kuśalaṃ √man, to consider good, approve AitBr. ŚāṅkhŚr.) ; well, healthy, in good condition, prosperous R. &c. ; fit for, competent, able, skilful, clever, conversant with (loc. [Pāṇ. 2-3, 40 ChUp. Mn. &c.] gen. [Pāṇ. 2-3, 40 Yājñ. ii, 181] inf. [MBh.],or in comp. [gaṇa śauṇḍâdi; Gaut Mn. &c.] ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśala, m. pl. N. of a people MBh. vi, 359 ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśala, m. N. of the Brāhmans in Kuśadvīpa BhP. v, 20, 16 ; N. of Śiva ; of a prince VP. ; of a grammarian (author of the Pañjikā-pradīpa) ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśalā, f. N. of a woman g. bāhv-ādi ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśalī, f. the plant Oxalis Corniculata (= aśmantaka) L. ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśala, m. the plant kṣudrâmlikā L. ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśala, n. welfare, well-being, prosperous condition, happiness TUp. Gaut. Āp. MBh. &c. [kuśalam-√pracch, to ask after another's welfare, to say “how do you do?” Mn. MBh. &c.; kuśalaṃ te (optionally with dat. Pāṇ. 2-3, 73), “hail to thee!” (used as a salutation, especially in greeting a Brāhman) MBh. &c.] ; benevolence R. ii, 34, 22 ; virtue L. ; cleverness, competence, ability Pañcat. ; N. of a Varsha governed by Kuśala VP. ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśalam, ind. well, in a proper manner, properly ChUp. ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśala, n. (in comp.) g. vispaṣṭâdi ; happily, cheerfully, (with √ās, “to be well”) BhP. ; ► p. 297b | |||
kúśalena, ind. in due order Gobh. (also in comp. kuśala-). ; ► p. 297b | |||
kuśala, n. (also) religious merit, Inscr.; MWB. 124 ► p. 1325a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
kuśala, nt. (= Pali kusala, synonym of puñña; in Skt. Lex. only, also syn. of puṇya), good in a moral sense (not so in Skt. literature), merit, righteous action; there are 10 kuśala (= Pali 10 kusala or sīla), Mvy 1685, listed 1686 -98, = (kuśala) karmapatha, q.v. for list. See the next items. | |||
► p. 188 | |||
==5、avaropaṇa== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ava-ropaṇa, n. planting MBh. xiii, 2991, causing to descend L. ; depriving, diminishing L. ► p. 103a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
avaropaṇa, nt. (to avaropayati; in Skt. in mg. planting), (1) cutting off (hair) (in this sense = Pali oropaṇa): LV 432.15 -keśāvaropaṇa-; (2) depositing (of relics, in a stūpa): dhātv-avaropaṇa Kv 20.2 (text dhyānāva°); 40.24; 41.1; 77.3 (in all three text dhātvāva°); (3) discredi-ting, lowering in estimation: Śikṣ 126.4 na mukhasākṣy-a-varopaṇa-vacano bhavati, he is not one to speak to the discredit of a direct witness. | |||
► p. 73 | |||
==6、śīlavat== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 śīlavat | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 tshul khrims dang ldan pa | |||
【释义】 〔古〕持戒,具戒,具尸羅,具尸羅者,由净戒,净持戒。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
śī́la-vat, mfn. possessed of a good disposition or character, well-conducted, moral Mn. MBh. &c. ; (ifc.) having the custom or practice of VarBṛS. ; ► p. 1079b | |||
śī́la-vatī, f. N. of a woman Kathās. ► p. 1079b | |||
==7、anya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 anya一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 añña | |||
〈藏〉 gzhan,gzhan pa,gzhan zhig,de las 'das pa,gud | |||
【释义】 [形、代] 其他的,(与⑤)不同的,另外的;某个〔古〕他,别,異,餘,除,離。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ánya 1., (3) n. inexhaustibleness (as of the milk of cows) AV. xii, 1, 4 (cf. ányā.). ► p. 45b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
anyá 2., as, ā, at other, different ; other than, different from, opposed to (abl. or in comp.) ; another ; another person ; one of a number ; anya anya or eka anya, the one, the other ; anyac ca, and another, besides, moreover [cf. Zd. anya ; Armen. ail ; Lat. alius ; Goth. aljis, Theme alja; Gk. ἄλλος for ἄλγο-ς; cf. also ἔνιοι] . ► p. 45b | |||
==8、buddha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 buddha 一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 buddha | |||
〈藏〉 sangs rgyas | |||
【释义】 [过分] 觉醒,觉悟。 | |||
[阳] 佛,佛陀。〔古〕 佛,佛陀。觉者 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
buddha, buddhi See cols. 2 and 3. ► p. 733a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
buddha, mfn. awakened, awake MBh. ; expanded, blown SāmavBr. ; conscious, intelligent, clever, wise (opp. to mūḍha) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; learnt, known, understood Āpast. MBh. (“by” , usually instr., but also gen. according to Pāṇ. 2-2, 12; 3, 67 Sch.) ; ► p. 733b | |||
buddha, m. a wise or learned man, sage W. ; (with Buddhists) a fully enlightened man who has achieved perfect knowledge of the truth and thereby is liberated from all existence and before his own attainment of Nirvāṇa reveals the method of obtaining it, (esp.) the principal Buddha of the present age (born at Kapila-vastu about the year 500 B.C. his father, Śuddhodana, of the Śākya tribe or family, being the Rāja of that district, and his mother, Māyā-devī, being the daughter of Rāja Su-prabuddha MWB. 19 &c.; hence he belonged to the Kshatriya caste and his original name Śākya-muni or Śākya-siṃha was really his family name, while that of Gautama was taken from the race to which his family belonged; for his other names see ib. 23; he is said to have died when he was 80 years of age, prob. about 420 B.C. ib. 49 n. 1; he was preceded by 3 mythical Buddhas of the present Kalpa, or by 24, reckoning previous Kalpa, or according to others by 6 principal Buddhas ib. 136; sometimes he is regarded as the 9th incarnation of Vishṇu Hariv. Kāv. Var. &c.) ► p. 733b | |||
buddha, n. knowledge BhP. (B. buddhi). ► p. 733b | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
Buddha, an 'Enlightened One', passim; Mvy 1 (and regularly) = Tib. saṅs rgyas; 35 Buddhas before whom serious offenses are to be confessed by Bodhisattvas, Śikṣ 169.4, see note. Many long lists of B's in most of the texts here included; in general, each name in such lists has been entered in my Dict. But one such list, Mmk 7.24-8.18, has been ignored; the text is very corrupt and obscure; division of the words is often uncertain; few of the names are known elsewhere, Five Buddhas called 'transcendent' by P. Mus, Barabudur, p. 577 ff. (L'origine des Cinq Jina; a full discussion here), Dharmas 3 et alibi, see the names Vairocana, Akṣobhya, Ratna-saṃbhava, Amitābha, Amoghasiddhi. | |||
► p. 400 | |||
==9、guṇa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 guṇa | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 yon tan, bsgres pa | |||
【释义】 [阳] ❶ 〈藏〉 yon tan性质,品质,品德,美德,功德。〔古〕 德,功德,勝德,有德,勝功德。❷ 线,带子,弓弦,琴弦。❸ 〈藏〉 bsgres pa 倍。〔语〕二合元音。〔古〕 倍,倍數。❹ 策略。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
guṇá, m. (√ grah Uṇ.) a single thread or strand of a cord or twine (e.g. tri-g° q.v.), string or thread, rope TS. vii Mṛicch. Kum. Ragh. ; a garland W. ; a bow-string R. iii, 33, 16 (cāpa-) Ragh. ix, 54 Ṛitus. Hit. ; (in geom.) a sinew ; the string of a musical instrument, chord Śiś. iv, 57: ifc. (f(ā). ) with numerals “fold, times” (see cátur-, tri-, daśa-, dví-, pañca-; rarely the numeral stands by itself along with guṇá [e.g. viśiṣṭo daśabhir guṇaiḥ, “of ten times higher value” Mn. ii, 85] AV. x, 8, 43 MBh. iii, 15649 Hariv. 509; [guṇa = bhāga] Pāṇ. 5-2, 47 Kāś.) ; a multiplier, co-efficient (in alg.) ; subdivision, species, kind (e.g. gandhasya guṇāḥ, the different kinds of smell MBh. xii, 6847) ; the 6 subdivisions of action for a king in foreign politics (viz. peace, war, march, halt, stratagem, and recourse to the protection of a mightier king) Mn. vii, 160 Yājñ. i, 346 MBh. ii, 155 ; = upâya (q.v., denoting the 4 ways of conquering an enemy) R. v, 81, 41 ; “requisite” see °ṇôpêta ; a secondary element, subordinate or unessential part of any action (e.g. sarva-guṇa mfn. “reaching to all subordinate parts,” hence “valid throughout” KātyŚr.) ŚāṅkhŚr. ĀśvŚr. KātyŚr. R. v, 1, 71 ; an auxiliary act ŚāṅkhBr. xxvi, 4 ; a secondary dish (opposed to anna i.e. rice or the chief dish), side-dish Mn. iii, 224 ff. ; (= -karman, in Gr.) the secondary or less immediate object of an action Pāṇ. 1-4, 51 Sch. ; a quality, peculiarity, attribute or property Lāṭy. ŚāṅkhGṛ. Mn. iii, ix, &c. ; an attribute of the 5 elements (each of which has its own peculiar quality or qualities as well as organ of sense; thus 1. ether has śabda, or sound for its Guṇa and the ear for its organ; 2. the air has tangibility and sound for its Guṇas and the skin for its organ; 3. fire or light has shape or colour, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the eye for its organs; 4. water has flavour, shape, tangibility, and sound for its Guṇas, and the tongue for its organ; 5. earth has the preceding Guṇas, with the addition of its own peculiar Guṇa of smell, and the nose for its organ) Mn. i, 20 and 76-78 MBh. xii, 6846 ff. Śak. i, 1 BhP. iii, 5, 35 ; (in Sāṃkhya phil.) an ingredient or constituent of Prakṛiti, chief quality of all existing beings (viz. sattva, rajas, and tamas i.e. goodness, passion, and darkness, or virtue, foulness, and ignorance; cf. RTL. pp. 31; 36; 163) Mn. i; iii, 40; xii, 24 ff. Sāṃkhyak. Bhag. xiii f. ; (hence) the number “three” VarBṛS. iic, 1 ; a property or characteristic of all created things (in Nyāya phil. twenty-four Guṇas are enumerated, viz. 1. rūpa, shape, colour; 2. rasa, savour; 3. gandha, odour; 4. sparśa, tangibility; 5. saṃkhyā, number; 6. parimāṇa, dimension; 7. pṛthaktva, severalty; 8. saṃyoga, conjunction; 9. vibhāga, disjunction; 10. paratva, remoteness; 11. aparatva, proximity; 12. gurutva, weight; 13. dravatva, fluidity; 14. sneha, viscidity; 15. śabda, sound; 16. buddhi or jñāna, understanding or knowledge; 17. sukha, pleasure; 18. duḥkha, pain; 19. icchā, desire; 20. dveṣa, aversion; 21. prayatna, effort; 22. dharma, merit or virtue; 23. adharma, demerit; 24. saṃskāra, the self-reproductive quality) ; an epithet KātyŚr. ; good quality, virtue, merit, excellence Mn. MBh. &c. ; also “power, might;” āt, “by virtue of,” “in consequence of,” “by means of” ; the merit of composition (consistency, elegance of expression, &c.) Kāvyâd. i, 41 f. Kpr. viii Sāh. viii ; the peculiar properties of the letters (11 in number, viz. the 8 bāhya-prayatnās [q.v.] and the 3 accents) Kāś. on Pāṇ. 1-1, 9 and 50 (cf. -mātra) ; the first gradation of a vowel, the vowels a (with ar, al Pāṇ. 1-1, 51), e, o Nir. x, 17 RPrāt. xi, 6 Pāṇ. ; an organ of sense L. ; a cook (cf. -kāra) L. ; Bhīma-sena (cf. -kāra) L. ; ► p. 357a | |||
guṇā, f. Sanseviera Roxburghiana L. ; the plant māṃsarohiṇī L. ; N. of a princess Rājat. iv, 695 (cf. nir-, vi-, sa-; gauṇa.) ► p. 357a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
guṇa, (1) m. (Skt. and Pali id., not recorded in this use), advantage: Mv i.155.7 (vs) kaṃ vā guṇaṃ karoti, or what good does it do? what use is it?; (2) m. (= Pali guṇa), cluster, bouquet, garland: LV 214.19 (vs) sugan-dhamālāṃ guṇapuṣpasaṃcayāṃ (acc. pl.), bunches of flowers in clusters, of garlanded flowers; kaṇṭhe-guṇa, see this; mālā-guṇa-parikṣiptaḥ Mvy 9463. See also antra-guṇa (in which guṇa may perhaps mean lit. garland, chain, i.e. of the intestines). | |||
► p. 212 | |||
==10、 | |||
==11、kīrtita== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 kīrtita | |||
【释义】 [过分] 提到,说起,称赞。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
kīrtita, mfn. said, mentioned, asserted ; celebrated known, notorious. ► p. 285b | |||
=sapudgaleṣu dharmeṣu saṃjñāyā viprahāṇataḥ | prajñāvantaś ca saṃjñāyā aṣṭadhāṣṭārthabhedataḥ ||11||= | |||
【支译】彼壽者及法 遠離於取相 亦說知彼相 依八八義別 11 | |||
【净译】能斷於我想 及以法想故 此名為具慧 二四殊成八 11 | |||
==1、sa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sa | |||
【释义】 [前缀] 有,连同,一起,和,带着,具有。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1137c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) . ► p. 1139a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1140b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, See 5. sa, ► p. 1111b. ► p. 1140c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1141b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1148b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1151a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1151b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 1., (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1181c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) ► p. 1183a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1189c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1190c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1191c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) ► p. 1192a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1195a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 1., the last of the three sibilants (it belongs to the dental class and in sound corresponds to s in sin). ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 2., (in prosody) an anapest ( ˘ ˘ ¯ ) ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 3., (in music) an abbreviated term for ṣaḍ-ja (See ► p. 1109b) . ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 4., m. (only L.) a snake ; air, wind ; a bird ; N. of Vishṇu or Śiva ; ► p. 1111b | |||
sā, f. N. of Lakshmi or Gaurī ; ► p. 1111b | |||
sa, n. knowledge ; meditation ; a carriage road ; a fence. ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 5., mfn. (fr. √ san) procuring, bestowing (only ifc.; cf. palu-ṣá and priya-sá). ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sá 6., the actual base for the nom. case of the 3rd pers. pron. tád q.v. (occurring only in the nom. sg. m.f. [sá or sás, sā], and in the Ved. loc. [sásmin RV. i, 152, 6; i, 174, 4; x, 95, 11]; the final s of the nom. m. is dropped before all consonants [except before p in RV. v, 2, 4, and before t in RV. viii, 33, 16] and appears only at the end of a sentence in the form of Visarga; sa occasionally blends with another vowel [as in saîṣaḥ]; and it is often for emphasis connected with another pron. as with aham, tvam, eṣa, ayam &c. [e.g. so 'ham sa tvam, “I (or thou) that very person;” cf. under tád, p.434] , the verb then following in the 1st and 2nd pers. even if aham or tvam be omitted [e.g. sa tvā pṛcchāmi “I that very person ask you” BṛĀrUp.; sa vai no brūhi “do thou tell us” ŚBr.]; similarly, to denote emphasis, with bhavān [e.g. sa bhavān vijayāya pratiṣṭhatām, “let your Highness set out for victory” Śak.]; it sometimes [and frequently in the Brāhmaṇas] stands as the first word of a sentence preceding a rel. pronoun or adv. such as ya, yad, yadi, yathā, cêd; in this position sa may be used pleonastically or as a kind of ind., even where another gender or number is required [e.g. sa yadi sthāvarā āpo bhananti, “if those waters are stagnant” ŚBr.]; in the Sāṃkhya sa, like eṣa, ka, and ya, is used to denote Purusha, “the Universal Soul”) RV. &c. &c. [cf. Zd. hō, hā; Gk. ὁ, $.] ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa 7., ind. (connected with saha, sam, sama, and occasionally in BhP. standing for saha with instr.) an inseparable prefix expressing “junction” , “conjunction” , “possession”(as opp. to a priv.), “similarity,” “equality” ; (and when compounded with nouns to form adjectives and adverbs it may be translated by “with,” “together or along with,” “accompanied by,” “added to,” “having,” “possessing,” “containing,” “having the same” [cf. sa-kopa, sâgni, sa-bhāya, sa-droṇa, sa-dharman, sa-varṇa]; or it may = “ly,” as in sa-kopam, “angrily,” sôpadhi, “fraudulently”) RV. &c. &c. [cf. Gk. $ in $; Lat. sim in simplex; sem in semel, semper Eng. same.] ► p. 1111b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1123c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1125a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa, (to be similarly prefixed to the following) : ► p. 1130c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sa-, inseparable prefix in 'pleonastic' positive use, as opp. of neg. (= Pali id., see Childers); sace(t), saca, sa-cchambita, saśakya, sāntarabahis, santika and sā° (°ke), see s.vv.: (lokapālān yakṣarākṣasa-)-gandharvabhu-jagagaṇa-saparivṛtān LV 209.19 (prose), attended by crowds of...; paribubhukṣitā (so Senart em., mss. paribhuk°) sma sapipāsitā (Senart em. saṃpi°, but no such cpd. is recorded) sma Mv i.8.2 (prose), we are hungry, we are thirsty; ayoguḍā hi agnismiṃ yathā-d-iva (so mss.) sa-tāpitā (so mss.) Mv i.15.15 (vs); this could be interpreted as m.c. for saṃtāpitā(ḥ), which Senart reads (unmetr.) by em.; sa-pṛthagjanasevitaṃ (dharmaṃ) Mv i.33.13 (vs); sajaḍaḥ sajaḍataro bhavati Śikṣ 152.12 (prose), he is stupid, very stupid. Cf. sajyotibhūta, satejobhūta, which do not require similar interpretation. (In sayyathīdaṃ, °thāpi, etc., the pronoun sa, tad, is concerned.) | |||
► p. 538 | |||
==2、pudgala== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pudgala | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 gang zag | |||
【释义】 [阳]〔古〕补特伽羅,人,數取趣者。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《现观庄严光明疏》: | |||
punaḥpunar gatiṣu līyata iti pudgalaḥ | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pudgala, mf(ā)n. beautiful, lovely, handsome MārkP. ; ► p. 633b | |||
pudgala, m. the body Hit. i, 41 v.l. ; (with Jainas) material object (including atoms) Śaṃk. MWB. 535 ; the soul, personal entity Lalit. ; man Var. ; the Ego or individual (in a disparaging sense) SaddhP. ; N. of Śiva MBh. (= deha Nīlak.) ; a horse of the colour of rock-crystal Gal. ► p. 633b | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pudgala, m., often written puṃgala (so regularly in LV, ŚsP, e. g. 4.1, and mss. of Mv, also Mmk 108.23; 112.19 etc.; RP 19.2; this writing also occurs in Skt., see BR, and Tedesco, JAOS 67.172 ff., who rightly observes that the word is essentially Buddh. and Jain, and offers an etym. which does not convince me; another reading found in Mv mss. is puṅgava, a Skt. word which may have influenced the form with nasal, pumgala; = Pali puggala; see also aprati-pu°, niṣ-pu°), = Skt. puruṣa, person, man, creature, soul (often in the latter sense = ātman, esp. in niṣ-pu°): SP 120.7; LV 103.14; 420.10; 423.13; 439.2; Mv i.4.2 (Senart always prints pudgala, contrary to most or all his mss. puṃg°); 47.2, 8; 80.13; 119.14; 142.4; 163.18; Bbh 46.22; Śikṣ 236.15 (puruṣo vā pudgalo vā); Ud xiii.14; Mvy 4674; 7028; ŚsP 4.1 etc.; Mmk 108.23; 112.19 etc.; catvāra ime.. . pudgalā bodhisattvena na sevitavyāḥ RP 18.17 (wicked persons, listed in sequel; here text repeatedly pudgala but in 19.2 puṃgala); pumgalādhyāśaya (Senart em. pudga°) Mv i.85.10; 88.12; 14, acc. to Senart, Introd. xxviii note, (inclination's) tournées vers la grande personnalité (i. e. the Buddha), which seems to me doubtful; rather = Skt. ātma-, with self-determined (directed, -controlled?) dispositions; eatvāraḥ pudgalāḥ Mvy 2968-72 (as in Pali, Puggala-paññatti 51 f. same terms in Pali form), tamas (separate word) tāmaḥparāyaṇaḥ, tamo jyotiṣparā°, jyotis tamaḥpara°. jyotlr jyotiṣparā°, i.e. one who is in a low state of existence and does evil (tending to still lower states), ditto but does good, who is in a good state but does evil, ditto and does good; eight pudgala Mv i.291.16 = Pali Khp. 6.6, on which comm. 182.11 f. says, te hi cattāro ca paṭipannā (viz. the four just listed above) cattāro ca phale ṭhitā (i. e. as reaping the fruits of their good or evil courses) ti aṭṭha honti. | |||
► p. 347 | |||
==3、dharma== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 dharma 一级词汇 | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 dhamma | |||
〈藏〉 chos | |||
【释义】 [阳] ❶ 法,正法,正义,法则,规律,职责,行为。❷ 〔佛〕 教法,说教。❸ 〔佛〕 范畴,事物。 ❹ 属性,性质。 | |||
〔古〕 法,法教,正法,达摩,达磨。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
❸《俱舍》: | |||
nirvacanaṃ tu svalakṣaṇadhāraṇād dharmaḥ | | |||
‹真›因何義立此名?能持自體相,故稱達磨。 | |||
‹玄›釋此名者,能持自相,故名為法。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
dharma 2., Nom. P. °mati, to become, law Vop. ► p. 512c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
dhárma 3., in comp. for °man q.v. 2. ► p. 512c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
dharma, See ► p. 510c. ► p. 513a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
dhárma 1., m. (rarely n. g. ardharcâdi; the older form of the RV. is dhárman q.v.) that which is established or firm, steadfast decree, statute, ordinance, law ; usage, practice, customary observance or prescribed conduct, duty ; right, justice (often as a synonym of punishment) ; virtue, morality, religion, religious merit, good works ( dhármeṇa ind. or °māt ind. according to right or rule, rightly, justly, according to the nature of anything; cf. below; °mesthita mfn. holding to the law, doing one's duty) AV. &c. &c. ; Law or Justice personified (as Indra ŚBr. &c.; as Yama MBh.; as born from the right breast of Yama and father of Śama, Kāma and Harsha ib.; as Vishṇu Hariv.; as Prajā-pati and son-in-law of Daksha Hariv. Mn. &c.; as one of the attendants of the Sun L.; as a Bull Mn. viii, 16; as a Dove Kathās. vii, 89, &c.) ; the law or doctrine of Buddhism (as distinguished from the saṅgha or monastic order MWB. 70) ; the ethical precepts of Buddhism (or the principal dharma called sūsra, as distinguished from the abhi-dharma or, “further dharma” and from the vinaya or “discipline,” these three constituting the canon of Southern Buddhism MWB. 61) ; the law of Northern Buddhism (in 9 canonical scriptures, viz. Prajñā-pāramitā, Gaṇḍa-vyūha, Daśa-bhūmîśvara, Samādhirāja, Laṅkâvatāra, Saddharma-puṇḍarīka, Tathā-gata-guhyaka, Lalita-vistara, Suvarṇa-prabhāsa,ib. 69) ; nature, character, peculiar condition or essential quality, property, mark, peculiarity (= sva-bhāva L.; cf. daśa-dharma-gata ŚBr. &c. &c.; upamānôpameyayor dh°, the tertium comparationis Pāṇ. 2-1, 55 Sch.) ; a partic. ceremony MBh. xiv, 2623 ; sacrifice L. ; the ninth mansion Var. ; an Upanishad L. ; associating with the virtuous L. ; religious abstraction, devotion L. ; = upamā L. (cf. above ) ; a bow Dharmaś. ; a thing, Sukh. i ; a Soma-drinker L. ; N. of the 15th Arhat of the present Ava-sarpiṇī L. ; of a son of Anu and father of Ghṛita Hariv. ; of a son of Gāndhāra and father of Dhṛita Pur. ; of a son of Haihaya and father of Netra BhP. ; of a son of Pṛithu-śravas and of Uśanas ib. ; of a son of Su-vrata VP. (cf. dharma-sūtra) ; of a son of Dīrgha-tapas, VāyuP. ; of a king of Kaśmīra, Rāj. iv, 678 ; of another man ib. vii, 85 ; of a lexicographer &c. (also -paṇḍita, -bhaṭṭa and -śāstrin) Cat. [cf. Lat. firmus, Lith. dermé.] ; ► p. 510c | |||
dhármeṇa, ind., see dharma , according to right or rule, rightly, justly, according to the nature of anything ; ► p. 510c | |||
dhármāt, ind., see dharma , according to right or rule, rightly, justly, according to the nature of anything ► p. 510c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
1 Dharma, as n. pr., (1) n. of a brother of Śāriputra: Mv iii.56.11; (2) n. of a Pratyekabuddha: Divy 200.12; (3) n. of a Buddha in the nadir: Sukh 98.8; (4) n. of a pupil of Mati 4 = Mahāmati 5, qq.v.: Laṅk 365.3. | |||
2 dharma, normally m. as in Skt.; occasionally (as in Pali, see Childers s.v. dhammo) nt.: SP 70.2 (vs) acc. to Kashgar rec. duḥśrāddheyam idaṃ dharmaṃ deśitam adya śāstṛṇām (ms.), but Tib. seems to support Nep. mss. which lack dharma; idam ... dharmaṃ śrutvā SP 71.3 (prose; KN em. to imaṃ, which WT keep without note); aśrutvaiva ... idam . .. dharmaṃ SP 60.4 (here kept with all mss. in both edd.); mā ... a-dharmaṃ utpadyate LV 15.10 (prose), may no wickedness arise; idaṃ dharmaṃ LV 396.1 (prose; acc. sg.); paramaṃ dharmaṃ Mv ii.99.5 (n. sg.; in next sentence dharmo). — (1) characteristic, quality, substantially as in Skt. (BR s.v. 2), but used in BHS, as in Pali dhamma, very commonly and in a way which seems specially pointed and deserving of special mention: asti-dharma, see s.v. 1 asti; vināśa-dharmeṇa (subject to destruction, perishable) mānsena Mv i.94.12; divyāś ca kāyāḥ parihāṇa- (v.l. °ṇi-) dharmāḥ SP 162.3 (vs), and divine bodies were characterized by diminution, i.e. became few (meaning proved by parallel 170.2; wrongly Burnouf and Kern); māreṇa ... īrṣyādharmaparītena LV 267.2 (prose), full of the quality of jealousy; catvāra ime ... duḥkhavipākā dharmāḥ RP 19.16 (prose), qualities that result in misery, i.e. vices; in Mv iii.200.5 are mentioned eight āścaryādbhuta dharma, marvelous qualities, of the Buddha, seven of which (the eighth apparently being omitted by mistake) are listed 200.6-202.2; they cor-respond imperfectly to the eight yathābhucca vaṇṇa of Pali DN ii.222.7, listed 222.13-224.14 (DN nos. 2, 4, 5, 6, and 8 = Mv nos. 2, 7, 3, 4, 6); śuddhāvāsā ca devā aṣṭādaśa āmodanīyāṃ dharmān (the eighteen 'qualities of rejoicing', here conditions of, elements or matters for re-joicing) pratilabhanti Mv ii.259.10 (they are listed in the sequel); (2) like Pali dhamma, dharma (or dharmāyatana) is the object of manas (as rūpa of cakṣus, etc.); sometimes rendered idea; it seems likely that, at least in origin, it meant quality, characteristic (= 1), as that element in the outside world which the indriya manas (as distinguished from the five external organs of perception) concerned itself with; see AbhidhK. LaV-P. i.45, where it is ex-plained that 'tho all the āyatanas are dharmas' (qualities), 'because it includes many and the chief (agra) dharma, one āyatana is specifically so called;' in any case this exclusively Buddhist use occurs: dharmāyatanam Mvy 2039; Dharmas 24; dharmadhātuḥ Mvy 2057 (after mano-dhātuḥ, as dharmāyatanam 2039 follows mana-āy°); manendriyaṃ dharmavicāraṇeṣu Suv 56.12; similarly 57.8, etc.; see also dharmāyatanika, s.v. āyatanika; (3) in Laṅk used in a peculiar sense; pañcadharmāḥ Laṅk 229.6; °rma- id. 2.2; the list of them is given id. 228.5 pañca-dharmo (v.l. °mā, which seems surely correct), nimittaṃ nāma vikalpas tathatā samyagjñānaṃ ca, which are then defined in the sequel, but I confess I find the definitions hard to understand; Suzuki, Studies 155 ff., discusses the passage and renders dharma by category; it seems likely that it started out as a specilized application of mg. (1), quality; (4) very commonly, as with Pali dhamma, state of existence, condition of being; crystallized in the phrase or cpd. dṛṣṭa dharma, the present state, the present life, see dṛṣṭa-dharma; (nāhaṃ ... ye) dharmā anityās te nityato deśayāmi, nāpi ye dharmā nityā te anityato deśayāmi Mv i.173.2, I do not teach that impermanent states are permanent, nor permanent ones impermanent; mostly restricted to states of empiric, hence transitory, worthless, existence: nairātmyaṃ ... dharmāṇāṃ Laṅk 1.4; nairātmy' aśubhāś (so divide, as Foucaux implies) ca dharm' ime LV 176.19 (vs); māyasamāṃs tatha svapnasamāṃś ca . .. samudīkṣati dharmāṃ; LV 308.9 (vs), but note in 10 that the word is used in two radically different senses, īdṛśa dharma-nayaṃ vimṛṣanto (considering as such the rule, nature, condition, of the states of existence) ... dhyāyati saṃsthitu dharme, he meditated ... steadfast in the Doctrine; dharma pratītya-samutthita buddhvā LV 308.13 (vs, just after prec), realizing that the states of being have originated by dependent-causation; śāntāḥ kila (read with WT °lā or with K' °laḥ) sarv' imi dharm' anāsravā ... (4) na cātra kaścid bhavatīha dharmo SP 117.3-4 (vs; Burnouf and Kern take dharma in 3 as law), all the conditions of being (in the saint) are calmed, free of the impurities (so that) there is not (any longer) in them under these conditions any state of (conditioned, empiric) existence; by extension, however, even nirvāṇa is called a dharma, state of being: (śreṣṭho ... ) dharmāṇa nirvāṇam iva Mv i.166.18 (vs), (Buddha is the best of creatures) as nirvāṇa of states of being; nirvṛtau ... dharma (loc. sg.) RP 6.9 (vs), in the state (of) nirvāṇa. See also the following cpds., esp. dharma-kāya. For Dharma as n. pr. see prec.; for dharma as adj. see next. I have not listed dharma law, doctrine (second of the 3 ratna, Dharmas 1 etc.), since it is both extremely common and hardly un-Skt. It may refer particularly to the collections of sūtras which set forth the Doctrine; see e. g. dharma-caryā. — dharma is also one of the four pratisaṃvid, q.v.; on the mg. here see esp. AbhidhK. LaV-P. vii.89ff., with references (note Dbh 77.3 ff.); it seems likely to belong to mg. (4) but definitions are confusingly variant and obscure. 3 dharma, f. -ā or (rarely) -ī, adj. ( = Skt. dharmya, dhārma; BHS also dhārmya, and as element in comp. dharmī-, dhārmī-, dhārmi-, dharmi-, dharmā-, qq.v.; Pali dhammī, as fem. adj. or as element in comp., as such also dhammi-, only with kathā), religious, only with kathā except for the last citations; on the forms cf. Senart i n. 574 (the regular Skt. dharmya also occurs); most commonly instr. sg.: dharmayā kathayā LV 38.13 (prose, all mss.; Lefm. and Calc. °myayā); Mv i.261.18 (prose, no v.l.); 297.16 (ib.); 309.2 (v.l. dhammā-); 329.14 (v.l.; text with 1 ms. °myayā); 333.19 (v.l. °māyā); 334.5 (v.l. °myā); 334.10, 16; iii.272.11 (v.l. dharmā-); dharmyā (v.l. dhārya-, intending dhārmya-?) kathayā iii.142.4; dharmā- (Senart em. °myā) kathayā iii.143.6; dhārmyayā kathayā Mv i.322.6; dhārmi-kathayā Mv i.282.3 (vs); less often acc. sg., dharmi-kathāṃ Mahāsamāj., Waldschmidt, Kl. Skt. Texte 4, 157.8; dharmī-kathāṃ Mv i.319.3 (v.l. dharmayā kathāṃ!); Divy 241.26 (3 of 4 mss. dhārmī- or dhārmi-), 28 (no v.l.); dhārmyāṃ kathāṃ Mv iii.446.9; dhārmyaṃ dharmacakraṃ Divy 393.23. In MPS 34.30 ff. dharma, f. °mā, occurs many times as adj. with other words than kathā (prāsāda, puṣkariṇī, tālavana); ed. al-ways em. to dhārma, f. °mī. | |||
► p. 276-277 | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
dharma-kāya, m. (in Pali recorded only as Bhvr. adj. in quite different sense, having a body that is, or is characterized by, the Doctrine, DN iii.84.24, said of the Buddha; see below for similar use in BHS); (1)the mass of conditions of existence, see s.v. kāya (2); (2) perhaps to be rendered spiritual body (?), contrasted with rūpa-kāya, q.v.: (dṛṣṭo mayopādhyāyānubhāvena) sa bhagavān dharmakāyena (in his spiritual form, or the like; he had not seen him physically) no tu rūpakāyena (but not in his physical form) Divy 19.11; similarly 360.19 ( ... na dṛṣṭo rūpakāyo me 20-21); na rūpakāyatas tathāgataḥ prajñā-tavyaḥ ... dharmakāyaprabhāvitāś ca buddhā bhagavanto na rūpakāya-prabhāvitāḥ Samādh 22.7 (Régamey, Absolute Body, Material Body; R. does not understand prabhāvita quite rightly; it means recognized, see BR s.v. bhū with pra, caus., 3); similarly 22.9 and esp. 34, with the explanation, dharmeṇa kāyu nirjito, (His) body is born (? see nirjita) by dharma; see Régamey p. 23; elsewhere, with the same contrast, the word dharma-k° is used as a Bhvr. adj. (cf. the Pali usage above, with which this usage may be directly connected), na hi tathāgato rūpakāyato draṣṭavyaḥ, dharmakāyās tathāgatāḥ AsP 513.15; instead of rūpakāya, simply kāya may be used in contrast, dharma-kāyā buddhā bhagavantaḥ, mā khalu punar imaṃ bhik-ṣavaḥ satkāyaṃ kāyaṃ manyadhvaṃ, dharmakāya-pariniṣpattito māṃ bhikṣavo drakṣyanty AsP 94.11-13; (3) perhaps to be rendered in the same way as (2), but considered the highest of three bodies of a Buddha, the others being saṃbhoga- and nirmāṇa-k°; this is a late formula (Régamey, l. c. above) and I have noted the triad only in Mvy 116-118 among texts included in this work (see under the others); (4) without specific contrast with other kāyas but most likely belonging to (2) rather than (3): sa dharmakāya-prabhāvito (see Samādh 22.7 above) darśanenāpi sattvānām arthaṃ karoti Śikṣ. 159.7; manomaya-dharmakāyasya tathāgatasya Laṅk 192.1 (AbhidhK. knows a manomaya-kāya, app. not identified with dharma-k°, see LaV-P. Index; acc. to ii.209 it pertains to the rūpa-dhātu); prob., na rājan kṛpaṇo loke dharma-kāyena saṃspṛśet Divy 560.2 (vs). [In LV 401.21 all mss. and Calc. read Dharmakāya as n. of one of the four devatās of the bodhi-tree; Lefm. Dharmakāma, with Tib. chos ḥdod; the em. seems plausible.] | |||
► p. 277 | |||
==4、saṃjñā== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 saṃjñā | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 'du shes,zhes bya bar 'gyur ba,ming | |||
【释义】 [阴] ❶ 认知,理解,会意。〔佛〕 〈藏〉 'du shes | |||
形成概念的思维活动。《俱舍》七十五法之一,大地法之一。〔古〕‹真›‹玄›想。假想,名,名想,想号。❷ 示意,标志。❸ 名称,专名,术语。 | |||
【例句】 ❶ 《俱舍》: | |||
saṃjñā saṃjñānaṃ viṣayanimittodgrahaḥ | | |||
'du shes ni 'dus nas shes pa ste/ yul la mtshan mar 'dzin pa'o || | |||
‹玄›想谓于境取差别相。 | |||
‹真› 想谓心执境差别相。 | |||
Abhidharmakośavyākhyā : viṣaya-nimitta-grāha iti. viṣaya-viśeṣa-rūpa-grāha ity arthaḥ. | |||
《顺正理论》: | |||
安立执取男女等境差别相因。说名为想。 | |||
《品类足论》: | |||
想云何?谓取像性。 | |||
● 瑜伽百法之一,遍行心所之一。 | |||
《集论》: | |||
想蕴何相。构了相是想相。谓由想故。构画种种诸法像类。随所见闻觉知之义起诸言说。 | |||
'du shes kyi mtshan nyid ci zhe na | 'dus te shes par byed pa'i mtshan nyid de | mtshan mar 'dzin pa dang | bkra bar 'dzin pa'i ngo bo gang gis ci ltar mthong ba dang | thos pa dang | bye brag phyed pa dang | rnam par shes pa'i don rnams la tha snyad 'dogs pa'o || | |||
《五蕴》: | |||
sañjñā katamā | viṣayanimittodgrahaṇam | tat trividham parīttaṃ mahadgatam apramāṇaṃ ca || | |||
'du shes gang zhe na | yul la mtshan mar 'dzin pa'o || de ni rnam pa gsum ste | chung ngu dang | rgya chen por gyur pa dang | tshad med pa'o || | |||
‹玄› 云何想蕴?谓于境界取种种相。 | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 saṃjñā | |||
【释义】 [动] saṃjānīte,saṃjānate 〈藏〉 shes pa,shes par 'gyur ba 知,令...了知,起...想。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-√jñā, P. Ā. -jānāti, -jānīte, (Ā.) to agree together, be of the same opinion, be in harmony with (loc.; accord. to Pāṇ. 2-3, 22, also instr. or acc.) RV. AV. VS. ŚBr. ; (A.) to obey (dat.) AitBr. ; (Ā.) to appoint, assign, intend (for any purpose), destine ib. ; (only ind.p. -jñāya) to direct, order, command Hariv. ; to acknowledge, recognize, own Pāṇ. 1-3, 46 Sch. ; (P.) to acknowledge or claim as one's own, take possession of SaddhP. ; (P.) to think of. recollect sorrowfully (with acc. or gen.) Pāṇ. Vop. ; Ā. to know well, understand R. ; to watch for Bhaṭṭ.: Caus. -jñā̆payati, °te, to cause to be of the same opinion or agree together AV. AitBr. ; to cause to acquiesce or agree in (euphemistically said of a sacrificial victim, which ought not to be led forcibly to its death but made to resign itself) ŚBr. GṛŚrS. MBh. BhP. ; to appease, satisfy MBh. Kālid. ; to make to be understood or known, cause to understand ŚBr. ; to make signs to (acc.), communicate or make anything known by signs Mṛicch. Hcar. ; to command, enjoin, instruct Hariv. ► p. 1133c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃ-jñā́, f. (ifc. f(ā).) agreement, mutual understanding, harmony TBr. ŚBr. Kathās. ; consciousness, clear knowledge or understanding or notion or conception ŚBr. &c. &c. ; a sign, token, signal, gesture (with the hand, eyes &c.; saṃjñām-√kṛ or dā, “to give a signal”) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; direction (in a-kṛtas°, “one who has received no direction”) MBh. ; a track, footstep BhP. ; a name, appellation, title, technical term (ifc. = “called, named”) Nir. Mn. MBh. &c. ; (in gram.) the name of anything thought of as standing by itself, any noun having a special meaning (saṃjñāyām therefore denotes “[used] in some peculiar sense rather than in its strictly etymological meaning” e.g. as a proper name) Pāṇ. 1-1, 34; 2, 53 &c. ; a technical expression in grammar (see -sūtra) ; (with Buddhists) perception (one of the 5 Skandhas q.v.) Dharmas. 22 MWB. 109 ; N. of the Gāyatrī (q.v.) L. ; of a partic. high number Buddh. ; N. of a daughter of Tvashṭṛi or Viśva-karman (the wife of the Sun and mother of Manu, Yama and Yamī) Hariv. Pur. ► p. 1133c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
saṃjñā, ifc. Bhvr. -saṃjña (cf. Skt. id.; the Skt. mgs. sign, signal, and name, are also BHS; note esp. vaidya-saṃjñāṃ ghoṣayitvā Divy 109.21, proclaiming the title of physician = saying that he was a physician; Pali saññā is used in most of the mgs. listed below; Tib. regu-larly ḥdu śes, a mechanically literal rendering), (1) aware-ness, consciousness, as a generalized faculty, fundamentally as in Skt.: cf. visaṃjña, unconscious (in a swoon, or the like) = Skt. id., e. g. SP 104.8; technical uses, see saṃjñā-vedayita-(vedita-)-nirodha, naivasaṃjñānāsaṃjñā-yatana (°nopaga); (2) not clearly distinguishable from prec., notion, conception, idea, of anything in the external world: the third of the five (upādāna-)skandha (as in Pali), see upādāna (sometimes rendered perception); when the Bodhisattva sat down at the bodhi-tree, he received (pratilabhati) at once five saṃjñā, ideas or impressions, viz. kṣema-s°, sukha-, śubha-, hita-, and (fifthly) adya cāhaṃ anuttarāṃ samyaksaṃbodhim abhisaṃbuddhiṣyati (so mss., Senart em. °ṣyaṃ ti) Mv ii.268.6-8, and similarly 404.17-19, where the fifth is substantially the same, the others being atīta-s°, kṣema-, sukha-, aśakya- (neither passage explains the first four); aśubha-saṃjñā (= Pali asubha-saññā), conceptions of foul things which must be meditated on by monks, see s.v. aśubha-bhāvanā; often prec. in comp. by other words specifying the emotional or intellectual content of the saṃjñā, (na ca) anitya-saṃjñā-bahulā viharanti Mv i.79.15, and (backsliders) dwell not abounding in the notion of the impermanence (of sentient existence, as they ought to); parikatha bhikṣu yadī na bhāra-saṃjñā LV 242.22 (vs), speak, monk, if you are not conscious of a burden (in doing as I ask), wrongly Foucaux on Skt. and Tib. (khur gyi ḥdu śes med na gsuṅs); in a neg., or impliedly or quasi-neg., expression, something like the very idea, thought, āhāra-saṃjñā ca na tatra bhe-ṣyati anyatra dharme rati dhyānaprītiḥ (Nep. mss. jñāna°) SP 206.1 (vs), and there will be no thought or idea of food, other than delight in the Doctrine and joy in meditation; adhimāna-saṃjñāṃ ca vihāya sarvāṃ SP 287.8 (vs), and abandoning every thought of pride; sukhaṃ vinaśyatī teṣāṃ sukha-saṃjñā ca naśyati SP 177.5 (vs), ... and the very notion of happiness was lost; tena ca mahatā duḥkhaskan-dhenābhyāhatā na duḥkhamanasikāra-saṃjñām utpāda-yanti SP 78.5, and, afflicted with that great mass of misery, they do not conceive the idea of putting their minds on misery (it does not occur to them to consider the question of misery seriously); (3) developing out of prec. (cf. āhāra-saṃjñā, SP 206.1 above, which might perhaps be rendered interest in, inclination towards food; and cf. AMg. saṇṇā = manovṛtti, mental inclination, Ratnach.), interest in, pur-poseful thought about: in Mv ii.147.12 (the Bodhisattva replies to his father's attempt to interest him in women; read with mss.) yasya tāta strīsaṃjñā bhaveyā so atra rajyeyā..., father, whoever has 'ideas' about women, let him take pleasure in them; the king replies, tava kīdṛśī saṃjñā bhavati 13, what are your thoughts or ideas?, to which the prince replies, mamātra viparītasaṃjñā bha-vati 14, I have the idea of the reverse, i.e. (as the sequel explains), that things are the opposite of what they seem; here saṃjñā belongs to 2 above; cf. viparīta-saṃjñin SP 320.12, s.v. saṃjñin (3); (4) in BHS esp. false notion, erroneous impression in the mind: in LV 374.11-12 (vss, unmetr. in Lefm.; see his note and Foucaux's note on Calc. 485.7) read, iha hetudarśanād vai jitā mayā hetukās trayaḥ saṃjñāḥ, nityānitye saṃjñā sukhaduḥkha 'nātmani cātmani ca, ... three false notions, (viz.) the notions about the permanent and impermanent, pleasure and pain, non-self and self; saṃjñā-graheṇa (by clinging to false notions) bālā dṛṣṭi-viparyāsa niśritā LV 235.17 (vs); samjñākṛta-mātram (a mere product of a false notion) idaṃ kaṇṭhako vahatīti vādiśārdūlaṃ Mv i.157.10 (the gods held the horse's hoofs); saṃjñāsūtraṃ (the cord of...) uddharī saṃskṛtātaḥ LV 196.2 (vs); vitarkamālā saṃjñāsūtreṣu granthitā LV 372.3 (vs), the garland of doubt, strung on the cords of ...; sattvānāṃ ... saṃjñā-vikalpa-caritānāṃ SP 318.13, of creatures whose actions are characterized by false notions and vain imaginings; mṛgiye ... taṃ prasrā-vaṃ pānīya-saṃjñāya (instr., under the mistaken impression that is was water) pītaṃ Mv iii.143.17, so 153.12, °saṃjñāye 144.7; 154,9; bhagavaṃ (mss. °vāṃ) mṛgasaṃjñena mayā etaṃ iṣu kṣiptaṃ Mv ii.213.16, under the mistaken im-pression of (your being) a deer (cf. 5 below) I shot this arrow; krīḍāratiṃ ca janayec chubha-saṃjña-tāṃ ca LV 190.5 (vs), ... and a state of having a false notion of (its being) fine (also cf. 5); keṣa-cid ... vartati saṃjñā Samādh 19.24, some have the false notion ..., and so, keṣa-ci saṃjñā 25; (5) in comp. with a prec. noun or adj. (as in some cases under 4), the notion or idea or impression, opinion, that (something or someone) is (what the prior member of the cpd. means); esp. as object of utpādayati (cf. SP 78.5, under 2 above) or a synonym, forms, conceives such an idea or opinion; the object of the idea is generally loc., sometimes gen. with antike, q.v., rarely acc., sometimes not expressed (understood from context): (tato imā asmākaṃ striyaḥ sarvakālaṃ) paribhavetsuḥ, tṛṇasaṃjñā pi na (mss. recorded as ta) utpādayetsuḥ (so read) Mv iii.393.14, then these our wives would always scorn us, would not even think we were worth a straw (lit. form a grass-blade-notion, sc. of us); śrotavyaṃ (read °vya, m.c.) buddhavacanaṃ dullabha-saṃjñām upajanetvā Mv i.248.2 (vs), one must listen to the word of a Buddha, realizing that it is hard to find; (te... durlabhaprādurbhāvāms) tathāgatān viditvāścaryasaṃjñām utpādayiṣyanti śoka-saṃjñām utpā° SP 320.1, ... will conceive the notion of surprise and sorrow, virtually = will be surprised and grieved; hīnasaṃjñā, a low (= unfavorable) opinion, (na tvayā...) °jñotpādayitavyā SP 425.9, and with loc. of object, mā hīnasaṃjñām utpādayiṣyasi tathāgate ca bo-dhisattveṣu ca tasmiṃś ca buddhakṣetre 426.2; the op-posite is viśiṣṭa-s°, LV 244.1-2, below; others with loc., śmaśāna-saṃjñāṃ (mss. °jño) janayate iṣṭikāsu Mv ii.384.22 (vs), forms the idea about women that they are (repulsive as) cemeteries; tāsu mātṛsaṃjñā upasthāpayitavyā bhaginī-saṃjñā duhitṛsaṃjñā Divy 115.5, you must learn to think of them as if mothers, sisters, daughters; kiṇīkṛta-(q.v., so read)-saṃjñā bhaveyur na ca tathāgate durlabha-saṃjñām uipādayeyuḥ SP 319.8, ... and would not conceive the diffi-culty of finding a T.; the object is in gen. with antike (q.v.), naiṣa mamāntike viśiṣṭasaṃjño (Bhvr.) bhaven LV 244.1-2, he would not have a high opinion of me; (sarvatathāgatānāṃ) cāntike pitṛsaṃjñām utpādayati sarvabodhisattvānāṃ cāntike śāstṛsaṃjñām utpā° SP 286.1; also SP 107.4-5 (see antike); object is acc., svabhavanāni śmaśāna-saṃjñām utpādayām āsuḥ LV 278.7, (gods etc.) began to think of their own dwellings as cemeteries (i. e. repulsive; = svāni vimānāni śmaśānānīva menire 280.20, vs); (6) (cf. Skt. mg. sign, symbol), alphabetic sign, letter: (yā) vā imā loke saṃjñā (mss. mostly sajñā, perh. representing a pronunciation like MIndic saññā, as in Pali?), brāhmī (etc., list of alphabets) Mv i.135.5; (7) a high number: Mvy 8034 .= Tib. brdaḥ śes; cf. mahā-saṃjñā, sarva-s°, visaṃjñāvatī. | |||
► p. 551-552 | |||
==5、viprahāṇa== | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vi-prahāṇa, n. disappearance, cessation MBh. ► p. 976b | |||
==6、prajñā== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pra-√jñā | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 'dogs pa,mngon pa,'cha' bar byed pa | |||
【释义】 [动9] prajānāti 〈藏〉 mkhyen pa,rab tu mkhyen pa,rab tu shes pa 〔古〕 知,了知,正了知。 | |||
[使] prajñapayati,prajñāpayati [使被] prajñāyate,prajñapyate 示,立名,施设。〔古〕假設,分别假立。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
yāvat satvadhātuḥ prajñapyamānaḥ prajñapyate 乃至凡是被名为众生界的都算上。 | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 prajñā | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 paññā | |||
〈藏〉 shes rab | |||
【释义】 [阴] 智慧。〔古〕 般若,慧,妙慧,勝慧,聖慧,正慧,智慧。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《薄伽梵歌》2.58: | |||
yadā saṃharate câyaṃ kūrmo ’ṅgānîva sarvaśaḥ | | |||
indriyāṇîndriyārthebhyas tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā || | |||
当人从根之对境,如龟收摄肢体般, | |||
彻底收摄回诸根,此人智慧乃坚定。 | |||
【百科与参考】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pra-√jñā, P. -jānāti, to know, understand (esp. a way or mode of action), discern, distinguish, know about, be acquainted with (acc.) RV. &c. &c. ; to find out, discover, perceive, learn MBh. Kāv. &c.: Caus. -jñā̆payati, to show or point out (the way) ŚBr. ; to summon, invite Lalit. ► p. 659a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pra-jñā́, f. wisdom, intelligence, knowledge, discrimination, judgement ŚBr. &c. &c. ; device, design ŚBr. ŚāṅkhŚr. ; a clever or sensible woman W. ; Wisdom personified as the goddess of arts and eloquence, Sarasvatī L. ; a partic. Śakti or energy Hcat. ; (with Buddh.) true or transcendental wisdom (which is three fold Dharmas. 110) MWB. 126; 128 ; the energy of Ādi-buddha (through the union with whom the latter produced all things) MWB. 204. ► p. 659b | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
prajñā (Skt., and Pali paññā), knowledge: three kinds, śrutamayī, cintāmayī, bhāvanāmayī (so in Pali cintāmayā, sutamaya, and bhāvanāmayā paññā, Childers): Mvy 1550-3; Dharmas 110. | |||
► p. 358 | |||
==7、adha== | |||
??? | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
ádha, or ádhā ind., Ved. (= átha, used chiefly as an inceptive particle), now, then, therefore, moreover, so much the more, and, partly. ádha—ádha, as well as, partly partly. ► p. 19c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
[adha, text in Sukh 22.8 (vs) -adha nānaprabhūta-, erroneously; read adhanāna (= °nānāṃ) prabhūta-.] | |||
► p. 12 | |||
=pṛthagbhāvena saṃtatyā vṛtter ājīvitasthiteḥ | punaś ca gatilīnatvād ātmasaṃjñā caturvidhā ||12||= | |||
==1、pṛthagbhāva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 pṛthagbhāva | |||
【释义】 [阳] 异相,异有。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
pṛthag-bhāva, m. separate state or condition, difference, distinctness, individuality KaṭhUp. MBh. &c. ► p. 646a | |||
==2、saṃtata== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 saṃtata | |||
【释义】 [过分] 延伸,连续。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sáṃ-tata, mfn. (cf. sa-tata) stretched or extended along, spread over (loc.) PraśnUp ; covered with (instr.) MBh. Hariv. R. ; held or linked or woven or sewn or strung together, dense, continuous, uninterrupted, lasting, eternal (ibc.or am ind. “continually, uninterruptedly, incessantly”) ŚBr. &c. &c. ; ► p. 1141c | |||
sáṃ-tatam, ind., see saṃtata , “continually, uninterruptedly, incessantly” ► p. 1141c | |||
==3、vṛt== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 vṛt | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 'dug pa | |||
【释义】 [动1Ā] vartate 存在,处于,发生,活动,转动,从事。〔古〕 轉。 | |||
【例句】 | |||
《那罗传》: | |||
yeṣām ahaṃ lokakṛtām īśvarāṇāṃ mahātmanām | | |||
na pādarajasā tulyo manas te teṣu vartatām || | |||
我连这些创世大神脚上的尘土都不如,你的心意转向他们吧。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vṛ́t 1., (ifc.; for 2. See ► p. 1009b) surrounding, enclosing, obstructing (See arṇo- and nadī-vṛt) ; a troop of followers or soldiers, army, host RV. ► p. 1007b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vṛt 1., cl.1 Ā. (Dhātup. xviii, 19) vártate (rarely °ti; in Veda also vavartti and [once in RV.] vartti; Subj. vavártat, vavartati, vavṛtat; Pot. vavṛtyāt, vavṛtīya; Impv. vavṛtsva; impf. ávavṛtran, °tranta; pf. vavárta, vavṛtús, vavṛté RV. [here also vāvṛté] &c. &c.; aor. avart, avṛtran Subj. vártat, vartta RV.; avṛtat AV. &c. &c.; avartiṣṭa Gr.; 3. pl. avṛtsata RV.; 2. sg. vartithās MBh.; Prec. vartiṣīṣṭa Gr.; fut. vartitā Gr.; vartsyáti,°te AV. &c.; vartiṣyati,°te MBh. &c.; Cond. avartsyat Br.; avartiṣyata Gr.; inf. -vṛ́te RV.; -vṛ́tas Br.; vartitum MBh. &c.; ind.p. vartitvā and vṛttvā Gr.; -vṛ́tya RV. &c. &c.; -vártam Br. &c.), to turn, turn round, revolve, roll (also applied to the rolling down of tears) RV. &c. &c. ; to move or go on, get along, advance, proceed (with instr. “in a partic. way or manner”), take place, occur, be performed, come off Mn. MBh. &c. ; to be, live, exist, be found, remain, stay, abide, dwell (with ātmani na, “to be not in one's right mind;” with manasi or hṛdaye, “to dwell or be turned or thought over in the mind;” with mūrdhni, “to be at the head of,” “to be of most importance;” kathaṃ vartate with nom. or kiṃ vartate with gen., “how is it with?”) ib. ; to live on, subsist by (instr. or ind.p.), ĀśvGṛ. MBh. &c. ; to pass away (as time, ciraṃ vartate gatānām, “it is long since we went”) BhP. ; to depend on (loc.) R. ; to be in a partic. condition, be engaged in or occupied with (loc.), ĀPast. MBh. &c. ► p. 1009b ; to be intent on, attend to (dat.) R. ; to stand or be used in the sense of (loc.) Kāś. ; to act, conduct one's self, behave towards (loc. dat., or acc.; also with itarêtaram or parasparam, “mutually”) Mn. MBh. &c. ; to act or deal with, follow a course of conduct (also with vṛttim), show, display, employ, use, act in any way (instr. or acc.) towards (loc. with parâjñayā, “to act under another's command;” with prajā-rūpeṇa, “to assume the form of a son;” with priyám, “to act kindly;” with svāni, “to mind one's own business;” kim idam vartase, “what are you doing there?”) ŚBr. Mn. MBh. &c. ; to tend or turn to, prove as (dat.) Śukas. ; to be or exist or live at a partic. time, be alive or present (cf. vartamāna, vartiṣyamāṇa, and vartsyat, p.925) MBh. &c. &c. ; to continue (with an ind.p., atîtya vartante, “they continue to excel;” iti vartate me buddhiḥ, “such continues my opinion”) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; to hold good, continue in force, be supplied from what precedes Pat. Kāś. ; to originate, arise from (abl.) or in (loc.) BhP. ; to become TBr. ; to associate with (saha) Pañcat. ; to have illicit intercourse with (loc.) R.: Caus. vartáyati (aor. avīvṛtat or avavartat; in TBr. also Ā. avavarti; inf. vartayádhyai RV.; Pass. vartyate Br.), to cause to turn or revolve, whirl, wave, brandish, hurl RV. &c. &c. ; to produce with a turning-lathe, make anything round (as a thunderbolt, a pill &c.) RV. R. Suśr. ; to cause to proceed or take place or be or exist, do, perform, accomplish, display, exhibit (feelings), raise or utter (a cry), shed (tears) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; to cause to pass (as time), spend, pass, lead a life, live, subsist on or by (instr.), enter upon a course of conduct &c. (also with vṛttim or vṛttyā or vṛttena; with bhaikṣeṇa, “to live by begging”), conduct one's self, behave Mn. MBh. &c. ; to set forth, relate, recount, explain, declare MBh. Hariv. R. ; to begin to instruct (dat.) ŚāṅkhGṛ. ; to understand, know, learn BhP. ; to treat Car. ; (in law, with śiras or śīrṣam) to offer one's self to be punished if another is proved innocent by an ordeal Vishṇ. Yājñ. ; “to speak” or “to shine” (bhāṣârthe or bhāsârthe) Dhātup. xxxiii, 108: Desid. vívṛtsati, °te (RV. Br.), vivartiṣate (Pāṇ. 1-3, 92) , to wish to turn &c.: Intens. (Ved., rarely in later language) várvartti, varīvartti, varīvartyáte, varīvartate, p. várvṛtat and várvṛtāna impf. 3. sg. avarīvar, 3. pl. avarīvur (Gr. also varivartti, varī̆vṛtīti, varvṛtīti, varīvṛtyate), to turn, roll, revolve, be, exist, prevail RV. ŚBr. Kāv. [cf. Lat. vertere ; Slav. vrǔtěti, vratiti ; Lith. vartýti ; Goth. waírthan ; Germ. werden ; Eng. -ward.] ► p. 1009a | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vṛt 2., mfn. (only ifc., for 1. see ► p. 1007b) turning, moving, existing ; (after numerals) = “fold” (see eka-, tri-, su-vṛt) ; ► p. 1009b | |||
vṛt, ind. finished, ended (a gram. term used only in the Dhātup. and signifying that a series of roots acted on by a rule and beginning with a root followed by ādi or prabhṛti, ends with the word preceding vṛt). ► p. 1009b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vṛt 3., See √vāvṛt, ► p. 947a. ► p. 1010b | |||
==4、ajīvita== | |||
(参考5) | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
a-jīvita, n. non-existence, death. ► p. 10b | |||
==5、jīvita== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 jīvita | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 srog,gson pa,'tsho ba,'tsho ba'i yun | |||
【释义】 [过分] 生活。 | |||
[中] 生命,生活。〔古〕 存活,命,身命,长壽,壽,净命。 | |||
【例句】 [中] 《那罗传》: | |||
dharmajñāḥ pṛthivīpālās tyaktajīvitayodhinaḥ | | |||
śastreṇa nidhanaṃ kāle ye gacchanty aparāṅmukhāḥ || | |||
知法的国王们是抛弃生命的勇士,于时带剑赴死而不顾。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
jīvitá, mfn. living Ragh. xii, 75 ; lived through (a period of time) W. ; (with or without punar) returned to life MBh. xii, 5686 Pañcat. Vet. ; enlivened, animated R. v, 66, 24 BhP. viii, 15, 3 ; ► p. 423b | |||
jīvitá, n. a living being RV. i, 1 i 3, 6 ; life, iv, 54, 2 AV. vi, 134, 1 ŚBr. xiv &c. ; ► p. 423b | |||
jīvitá, n. (ifc. f(ā). Kathās.) ; ► p. 423b | |||
jīvitá, n. duration of life L. ; livelihood Hit. i, 4, 36 (v.l.) ; cf. a-. ► p. 423b | |||
==6、sthita== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sthita | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 gnas,gnas pa,gnas par 'gyur ba,sdod pa,brtan pa,'greng ba | |||
【释义】 [过分] 站立,停留,处于,固定,确立,坚定。〔古〕 住,已住,安住,正安住,安住者,敦肃。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sthita, sthiti &c. See p.1264. ► p. 1265b | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sthitá, mfn. standing (as opp. to “going,” “sitting,” or “lying;” parasparaṃ sthitam, “standing opposed to each other;” sthitaṃ tena, “it was stood by him” = “he waited”) Mn. MBh. &c. ; standing firm (yuddhe, “in battle”) Hariv. ; standing, staying, situated, resting or abiding or remaining in (loc. or comp.; with uccâvaceṣu, “abiding in things high and low;” with anityam, “not remaining permanently,” “staying only a short time”) KātyŚr. Mn. MBh. &c. ; being or remaining or keeping in any state or condition (loc., instr. abl. comp., or a noun in the same case, also ind.p. or adv.; vyāpya sthitaḥ, “he keeps continually pervading” Śak. Vikr.; upaviśya sthitaḥ, “he remains sitting” Vikr.; kathaṃ sthitâsi, “how did you fare?” Vikr. ► p. 1264b; evaṃ sthite, “it being so” Pañc.; puraḥ sthite, “it being imminent”) MBh. Kāv. &c. ; engaged in, occupied with, intent upon, engrossed by, devoted or addicted to (loc. or comp.), performing, protecting Mn. MBh. &c. ; abiding by, conforming to, following (loc.) ib. ; being in office or charge Pañcat. Rājat. ; adhering to or keeping with (loc.) Hariv. ; lasting RPrāt. ; firm, constant, invariable Kathās. ; settled, ascertained, decreed, established, generally accepted ŚBr. &c. &c. ; fixed upon, determined Śak. ; firmly convinced or persuaded MBh. Subh. ; firmly resolved to (inf. or loc.) MBh. R. &c. ; faithful to a promise or agreement L.: upright, virtuous L. ; prepared for or to (dat.) Yājñ. Kum. ; being there, existing, present, close at hand, ready (sthito hy eṣaḥ, “I myself am ready;” agraje sthite, “when the elder brother is there”) Mn. MBh. &c. ; belonging to (gen.) R. ; turned or directed to, fixed upon (loc. or comp.) VarBṛS. Sarvad. ; resting or depending on (loc.) MBh. R. &c. ; leading or conducive to (dat.) Pañcat. ; one who has desisted or ceased Pañcad. ; left over L. ; (in Vedic gram.) not accompanied by iti (in the Pada-pāṭha) , standing alone (pade sthite, “in the Pada text”) Prāt. ; ► p. 1264b | |||
sthitá, n. standing still, stopping Bhartṛ. ; staying, remaining, abiding R. ; manner of standing ib. ; perseverance on the right path ib. ► p. 1264b | |||
==7、punar== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 punar | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 phyir,kyang,yang na,gzhan yang | |||
【释义】 [不变] 又,再次,然而。〔古〕 復,更,或。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
púnar, ind. back, home, in an opposite direction RV. &c. &c. (with √ 1. gam, yā, to go back or away; with √ dā, to give back, restore; with √ bhū, to turn round; with √ as and dat., to fall back upon) ; again, once more (also with bhūyas) ib. (with √ bhū, to exist again, be renewed, become a wife again, re-marry) ; again and again, repeatedly ib. (mostly púnaḥ p° which with na = nevermore) ; further, moreover, besides ib. (also punar aparam; ādau-punar-paścāt, at first-then-later) ; however, still, nevertheless MBh. Kāv. &c. (at the end of a verse it lays stress on a preceding atha vā, api vā, or vā alone; punar api, even again, on the other hand, also; kadā p°, at any time, ever; kim p°, how much more or less? however; punar-punar, now-now; at one time - at another time). ► p. 633b | |||
==8、gati== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 gati | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 bgrod pa,'jug pa,'gro ba | |||
【释义】 [阴] ❶ 行进,进入,脚步。 ❷ 途径,去向,命运。 ❸ 到达,获得,位置,范围。〔古〕 趣,行,所行,往來,往游涉。MIA gatīhi loc.pl. Mvu. ṣaṭsu gatīhi。(近义saṃcāra/prasara) | |||
【例句】 《世道百咏》34:dānaṃ bhogo nāśas tisro gatayo bhavanti vittasya | | |||
yo na dadāti na bhuṅkte tasya tṛtīyā gatir bhavati || | |||
‹金克木› 施舍、受用与散失,钱财有三条去路; | |||
若不施舍又不享受,它只剩下第三途。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
gáti, f. going, moving, gait, deportment, motion in general RV. v, 64, 3 VS. TS. &c. ; manner or power of going ; going away Yājñ. iii, 170 ; procession, march, passage, procedure, progress, movement (e.g. astra-g°, the going or flying of missile weapons R. v; parāṃ gatiṃ-√gam, “to go the last way,” to die; daiva-g°, the course of fate R. vi Megh. 93; kāvyasya g°, the progress or course of a poem R. i, 3, 2) ; arriving at, obtaining (with gen. loc., or ifc.) ŚBr. ix MBh. &c. ; acting accordingly, obeisance towards (loc.) Āp. i, 13 f. ; path, way, course (e.g. anyatarāṃ gatiṃ-√gam, “to go either way,” to recover or die ĀśvŚr.) R. Bhag. &c. ; a certain division of the moon's path and the position of the planet in it (the diurnal motion of a planet in its orbit?) VarBṛS. ; issue Bhag. iv, 29 ; running wound or sore Suśr. ; place of issue, origin, reason ChUp. i, 8, 4 f. Mn. i, 110 R. Mudr. ; possibility, expedient, means Yājñ. i, 345 R. i Mālav. &c. ; a means of success ; way or art, method of acting, stratagem R. iii, vi ; refuge, resource Mn. viii, 84 R. Kathās. Vet. iv, 20 ; cf. RTL. p.260 ; the position (of a child at birth) Suśr. ; state, condition, situation, proportion, mode of existence KaṭhUp. iii, 11 Bhag. Pañcat. &c. ; a happy issue ; happiness MBh. iii, 17398 ; the course of the soul through numerous forms of life, metempsychosis, condition of a person undergoing this migration Mn. Yājñ. MBh. &c. ; manner ĀśvGṛ. i Sch. ; the being understood or meant Pat. ; (in gram.) a term for prepositions and some other adverbial prefixes (such as alam &c.) when immediately connected with the tenses of a verb or with verbal derivatives (cf. karmapravacanīya) Pāṇ. 1-4, 60 ff.; vi, 2, 49 ff. and 139; viii, 1, 70 f. ; a kind of rhetorical figure Sarasv. ii, 2 ; a particular high number Buddh. ; “Motion” (personified as a daughter of Kardama and wife of Pulaha) BhP. i, v, 1 ; ► p. 347c | |||
gáti, m. N. of a son of Anala Hariv. i, 3, 43. ► p. 347c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
gati, f., (1) (= Pali id.) state of existence into which rebirth is possible; destiny, (future) state. As in Pali, there are normally five: hell (naraka, niraya; nairayika), animals (tiryak, tiryagyoni, tiryaggata), ghosts (preta, yamaloka, °kika), gods, men; or six, with addition of asuras. The first three are evil, durgati (tisṛṇāṃ durgatīnāṃ SP 260.8, listed 9), or apāya, q.v. A brief summary of the 5 or 6 gati in LaVallée Poussin, AbhidhK. iii.ll. Lists of 5, Samādh 19.17; Divy 300.10-11; 301.20; of 6, Dharmas 57; SP 244.12-14; without listing, aniṣṭa-gati-( = dur-gati)-traya-, and abhimata-gati-dvaya- (= gods and men), Av i.244.14; pañca-gati- SP 131.16; LV 173.16; ṣaḍgati-, v.l. pañcagati-, SP 135.14, ṣaṭsu gatiṣu, or (vss) ṣaṭsū gatīṣū, gatīṣu ṣaṭsū, SP 6.9; 9.6; 48.3; 54.11; ṣaṭsu gatīhi (loc.!) Mv i.42.17 (vs); ṣaṭsu gatiṣu 337.5 (prose); six also Mv ii.368.12 (text uncertain); existence even in the relatively favorable states is still evil, cf. SP 48.3 ṣaṭsū gatīṣū parikhidyamānāḥ; in Śikṣ 147.14 a totally different list of four (evil) gati is given, viz. (1) akṣaṇa-gati (see s.v. akṣaṇa), (2) going to a Buddha-field which contains no Buddha, (3) birth in a heretical family, (4) sarvadurgati-gati; (2) a high number: Mvy 7800; 7930 (cited from Gv); 8026; Gv 106.20; 134.5; (3) in gatiṃ-gata, q.v., perhaps to be taken in the sense of understanding, comprehension, knowledge; Tib. in this cpd. renders rtogs pa, understanding, and uses the same translation when gati is associated with such words as smṛti, mati, as in LV 8.2 smṛti-mati-gati-dhṛty-uttapta-; see s.v. gatima(nt). See next two. | |||
► p. 208-209 | |||
==9、līnatva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 līnatva | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 zhum pa nyid,bying nyid | |||
【释义】 〔古〕下劣性,下劣 。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
līna-tva, n. (ifc.) sticking or concealment in, Suśr. ► p. 903b | |||
==10、caturvidha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 caturvidha | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 rnam pa bzhi,rnam pa bzhi po | |||
【释义】 〔古〕四種。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
cátur-vidha, mfn. (cát°) fourfold, of 4 sorts or kinds ŚBr. vii ŚāṅkhŚr. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 385a | |||
cátur-vidham, ind. (am) in 4 ways MBh. v, 1118 (ŚārṅgP.) ► p. 385a | |||
=Sarvābhāvād abhāvasya sadbhāvān nābhilāpyataḥ | abhilāpaprayogāc ca dharmasaṃjñā caturvidhā ||13||= | |||
==1、sarva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sarva | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 sabba | |||
〈藏〉 thams cad | |||
【释义】 [形] 全部,所有,一切。皆,众,诸,一切,一切皆。 | |||
【变形】 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sárva, mf(ā)n. (perhaps connected with sāra q.v.; inflected as a pronoun except nom. acc. sg. n. sarvam, and serving as a model for a series of pronominals cf. sarva-nāman) whole, entire, all, every (m. sg. “every one;” pl. “all;” n. sg. “everything;” sometimes strengthened by viśva [which if alone in RV. appears in the meaning “all,” “every,” “every one”] and nikhila; sarve'pi, “all together;” sarvaḥ ko'pi, “every one so ever;” gavāṃ sarvam, “all that comes from cows;” sarva with a negation = “not any,” “no,” “none” or “not every one,” “not everything”) RV. &c. &c. ; of all sorts, manifold, various, different MBh. &c. ; (with another adjective or in comp.; cf. below) altogether, wholly, completely, in all parts, everywhere RV. ChUp. &c. ; ► p. 1184c | |||
sárvam, ind. (with sarveṇa) completely Divyâv. ; ► p. 1184c | |||
sárva, m. (declined like a subst.) N. of Śiva MBh. ; of Kṛishṇa Bhag. ; of a Muni Cat. ; pl. N. of a people MārkP. ; ► p. 1184c | |||
sárva, n. water Naigh. i, 12. [cf. Gk. $ for $ Lat. salvus.] ► p. 1185a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sarva (Skt.), all; adv. forms, esp. sarveṇa (noted by itself as adv. only in Mv i.90.6, all mss., Senart em. sarve te, wrongly), altogether; this is commonly emphasized by addition of a variety of other adv. forms in mg. ab-solutely altogether, in the most complete way: esp. sarveṇa sarvam (= Pali sabbena sabbaṃ) SP 321.8; LV 255.18; Mvy 6405; Mv ii.260.6, 7; 261.8; iii.223.6, 8; Divy 39.1; 105.7; 270.11; 502.22; Śikṣ 349.11; Mmk 400.5; 561.17; Dbh. 39.26; Bbh 324.1; in Mv i.126.8 prob. read sarveṇa sarvaṃ (ed. with mss. sarva-)śūnyaṃ; sarveṇa sarvaṃ sarvathā SP 77.7; Bbh 11.19; sarvathā sarvaṃ (= Pali sabbathā sabbaṃ) Mvy 6406 (follows 6405, above); sar-veṇa sarvaṃ sarvathā sarvaṃ Śikṣ 349.20; 350.7, 13; Laṅk 255.4; Suv 169.1, 6; AsP 25.13 et al.; sarveṇa sarvaḥ (read sarvaṃ) sarvathā sarvaṃ sarvadā Śikṣ 9.13, see note p. 395, which cites Bcp. as reading in the same passage sarveṇa sarvaṃ sarvathā, only. See also sarvehi and sarvatratāye. | |||
► p. 583 | |||
==2、sadbhāva== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 sadbhāva | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 yod pa,dngos po yod pa,mnga' ba | |||
【释义】 [阳] ❶ 真情,亲情。❷ 实有。〔古〕 有,實是有。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
sad-bhāva, m. real being, existence Bhag. R. MārkP. &c. ; the being true, truth, real state of things (śāstra-bh°, “the true purport of a work”) MBh. VarBṛS. BrahmaP. &c. ; the quality of goodness W. ; uprightness GāruḍaP. ; goodness, kindness, affection for (prati), faithfulness MBh. Kāv. Kathās. &c. ► p. 1137b | |||
==3、abhilāpya== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 abhilāpya | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 brjod pa | |||
【释义】 [] 〔古〕可言説,所言説。 | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
abhilāpya (rare except in neg. anabhi°, nirabhi°, qq.v.), expressible, that can be put in words: Bbh 265.16 °pya-vastu; 20 °pyāḥ svabhāvā dharmāṇām. In the prose Introduction to Bhad, line 2, Watanabe reads paraṃ-parābhilāpyānabhilāpya-buddhakṣetra-, but the true read-ing is paraṃparānabhilāpyānabhi° with v.l. and Gv 543.6; see anabhilāpyānabhilāpya. | |||
► p. 56 | |||
==4、caturvidha== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 caturvidha | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 rnam pa bzhi,rnam pa bzhi po | |||
【释义】 〔古〕四種。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
cátur-vidha, mfn. (cát°) fourfold, of 4 sorts or kinds ŚBr. vii ŚāṅkhŚr. Mn. &c. ; ► p. 385a | |||
cátur-vidham, ind. (am) in 4 ways MBh. v, 1118 (ŚārṅgP.) ► p. 385a | |||
=adhimuktivaśāt teṣāṃ bhūtasaṃjñā prasādataḥ | yathārutāgrahāt saṃyagdeśitatvasya codgrahāt ||14||= | |||
==1、adhimukti== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 adhi-mukti | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈巴〉 adhimutti | |||
【词根来源】 √muc | |||
【释义】 [阴]确信,坚信。〔古〕勝解,信解。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
adhi-mukti, f. propensity ; confidence. ► p. 21c | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 | |||
adhimukti, f. ( = Pali adhimutti; to adhimucyate), (1) strong inclination, attachment; earnest, zealous application; Tib. mos pa (Jäschke, to be pleased, la with; to wish, to have a mind; to take pleasure in, to rejoice at; as substantive pleasure, satisfaction, esteem; also to respect, to esteem, to respect with devotion, to revere, to adore); La V-P. AbhidhK. Index = ruci; cf. Bbh 95.12-13 kathaṃ ca bodhisattvo 'dhimuktibahulo bhavati? iha bodhisattvo 'ṣṭavidhe 'dhimuktyadhiṣṭhāne śraddhāprasādapūrvakeṇa niścayena rucyā samanvāgato bhavati. (Other alleged meanings, as croyance Lévi Sūtrāl. i.13 note 1; confiance, Burnouf; good will, Kern, in translation of SP; etc., are not supported by BHS usage, except as under 2, below.) It may be (but rarely is) applied to (a) non-religious objects: sa ca puruṣas (the father) teṣāṃ kumārakāṇām (his ignorant sons) āśayajño bhaved, adhimuktiṃ ca vijānīyāt, SP 73.14-15, ... and he understands their inclinations, what they are interested in. But usually the object is related to (b) a religious aim. It may be specified, syntactically (in the loc), as in yaṃ ... sugataḥ prabhāṣate, adhimuktisaṃ-panna bhavāhi tatra SP 32.15, what the Buddha soys, be perfect in zealous application to that. Usually it is not so specifically stated, tho the context is apt to suggest that it is zealous cultivation (study or propagation) of sacred texts or religious instruction that is meant (note-that the object of the verb adhimucyate is commonly some-thing of this sort); cf. e. g. -lokaṃ yathādhimuktyā (according to their [varying types or degrees of] zeal or application) subhāṣitena saṃtoṣayantam LV 160.17; adhimuktisāro yo syād ... saḥ, puṇyaṃ labheta yo etaṃ (most mss.) sūtraṃ vācel likheta vā SP 342.3-4. And this is probably meant as a rule when the context gives no special clue, as in many of the following: SP 6.13; 31.6; 93.9; 125.8, 235.10; 274.10; LV 10.11; 182.20; 432.8; Mvy 856; Samādh 22.43; RP 20.5; Bhad 7,48; Bbh 195.12; anadhimukti, lack of (religious) zeal RP 19.18; 35.4; various gods in Mv ii.309.14 ff. see the bodhi-tree svakāye adhmuktīye, according to their tastes, inclinations, interests (Senart suivant l'inclination de chaenn) as made of variousprecious materials; one of the ten bala of a tathāgata is nānādhimuktijñānabala Mvy 122 (and cf. Mv i.159.15 adhimuktinānātvaṃ vetti, as one of the ten bala); adhi-muktivaśitā Mvy 776, one of the 10 vaśitā of a Bodhisattva; yathādhimuktyā, adv., LV 160.17 (above) and 179.17; hīnādhimukti, attachment to low ends, SP 115.12 (cf. hīnādhimukta, °tika, s.vv. adhimukta, °tika); (in LV 294.4 for vidyādhimuktiprabhaḥ read probably vidyāvi-mukti°, having the splendor of (true) knowledge and emancipation, so Tib., rnam par grol ba = vimukti); (2) magic transformation, in adhimukti-balena LV 385.5, see s.v. adhimucyate (2), and adhitiṣṭhati, end. | |||
► p. 14 | |||
==2、vaśa== | |||
梵汉词汇表 | |||
【析词】 vaśa | |||
【对译词】 | |||
〈藏〉 dbang | |||
【释义】 [形] 隶属的,服从的,着迷的,(复合后词),控制。 | |||
[阳、中] 愿望,控制,约束。 | |||
〔古〕 力,自在。 | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
vaśa 2., n. (cf. vasā) liquid fat, grease AV. AitBr. Kāṭh. ► p. 929c | |||
M. Monier-Williams, Sanskrit-English Dictionary, 1899 | |||
【释义】 | |||
váśa 1., m. will, wish, desire RV. &c. &c. (also pl. váśān ánu or ánu váśa, “according to wish or will, at pleasure”) ; authority, power, control, dominion (in AV. personified) ib. (acc. with verbs of going e.g. with √ i, anu-√i, √ gam, ā-√gam, √ ya, ā-√pad, ā-√sthā &c., “to fall into a person's [gen.] power, become subject or give way to;” acc. with √ nī, ā-√nī and pra-√yuj, or loc. with √ kṛ, √ labh or Caus. of √ sthā or saṃ-√sthā, “to reduce to subjection, subdue;” loc. with √ bhū, √ vṛt, √ sthā and saṃ-√sthā, “to be in a person's [gen.] power;” vaśena,°śāt,and°śa-taḥ, with gen. or ifc., “by command of, by force of, on account of, by means of, according to”) ; birth, origin L. ; a brothel L. (cf. veśa) ; Carissa Carandas L. ; the son of a Vaiśya and a Karaṇī L. ; N. of a Ṛishi preserved by the Aśvins RV. ; (with aśvya) of the supposed author of RV. viii, 46 (in ŚBr. &c. also of this hymn itself) ; = vālmīki Gal. ; pl. N. of a people AitBr. MBh. ; ► p. 929a | |||
váśā, f. See below ; ► p. 929a | |||
váśa, mf(ā)n. willing, submissive, obedient, subject to or dependent on (gen.) Kathās. BhP. Pañcat. ; docile L. ; free, licentious L. ► p. 929a | |||
Franklin Edgerton, Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary, 1953 | |||
【释义】 vaśa, m.; app. as an extension of the Skt. use of -vaśena, -vaśāt, on account of, for the sake of, by reason of (so very often BHS, e. g. vaineya-vaśena, for the sake or purpose of conversion, SP 319.1; Mv i.238.8; 307.9; 312.5), we have first a periphrasis of -vaśena by -vaśam upādāya, SP 320.4; Gv 206.5, see s.v. upādāya (1d), adopting the purpose of.. .; so that vaśa seems to acquire a mg. (for which I have found no exact parallel elsewhere) basis, motivation, (controlling) motive, as in: sa imam arthavaśaṃ saṃpaśyan Śikṣ 22.3, he, perceiving this basis (motiimtion) of (his) aim, i.e. perceiving that the processes just described have their aim thus based or motivated. | |||
► p. 473 |